Giáo án Tiếng Anh 6 học kỳ 1 (sách thí điểm)

Giáo án Tiếng Anh 6 học kỳ 1 (sách thí điểm). Tài liệu được biên soạn dưới dạng file PDF bao gồm 95 trang tổng hợp các kiến thức giúp thầy cô và các bạn tham khảo, ôn tập và đạt kết quả cao trong kỳ thi sắp tới. Mời các bạn đón xem!

Chủ đề:
Môn:

Tiếng Anh 6 1 K tài liệu

Thông tin:
108 trang 1 năm trước

Bình luận

Vui lòng đăng nhập hoặc đăng ký để gửi bình luận.

Giáo án Tiếng Anh 6 học kỳ 1 (sách thí điểm)

Giáo án Tiếng Anh 6 học kỳ 1 (sách thí điểm). Tài liệu được biên soạn dưới dạng file PDF bao gồm 95 trang tổng hợp các kiến thức giúp thầy cô và các bạn tham khảo, ôn tập và đạt kết quả cao trong kỳ thi sắp tới. Mời các bạn đón xem!

81 41 lượt tải Tải xuống
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 13/8 /2017 Date of teaching:6A,D,E :17 /8 /2017
PERIOD 2:UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Lesson 1: Getting Started :A specialday
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can know the key language and structures to be learnt in
this unit.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the items related to the school.
2.
Structures: The present simple and the present continuous tense.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, picture.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher
Students
Content
Time
Pre-
teach:
Pre-teach:
-
Write the title on the board
‘A special day’. Explain the
meaning of special and ask
Ss to guess what the picture
might show or what the
conversation might be about.
-
Let Ss open their books and
check their answers.
-
Ask Ss questions about the
picture.
-Whole class
* Presentation:
Guess what the picture
might show or what the
conversation might be
about.
-
What is Phong doing?
-
Who are Vy and Phong?
-
Why is it a special day?
5
mins
While-
teach:
While-teach:
1. Listen and read:
- Play the recording
a) True or false:
-
Ask Ss to read the dialogue
again and decide whether the
statements are true or false.
-
Allow Ss to share answers
before discussing as a class.
b) Special expression:
-
Tell Ss to refer back to the
conversation to find the
expressions.
-
Practice saying them
together.
c) Role play:
- Ask Ss to role-plays the
-
Listen and
read
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
-
Whole class
1. Listen and read
* Practice:
a)
Are these sentences true
or false?
Key:
1. T 2. T 3. F
4. T 5. F
b)
Find these expressions in
the conversation. Check
what they mean
Key:
1.
Used to express surprise
(negative).
2.
‘You’ll find out.’
3.
Used to invite sb in.
4.
Used to say
‘yes’/‘alright’.
c. Create short role-plays
10
mins
School year: 2018-2019
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
While-
teach:
short conversations in pairs
before creating short role-
plays.
- Ask Ss to extend the
conversations.
-
Pair-work
-
Pair-work
with the expressions. Then
practice them.
2. Listen and read the
poem:
-
Play the recording.
-
Let Ss read the poem in the
right intonation and rhythm
and check their
understanding of the poem.
-
Ask Ss to write a poem
about their partner, then read
them poem aloud.
-
Listen and
repeat
-
Individual
work
2. Listen and read the
poem.
Example:
Khanh is going to back to
school today.
His friends are going back
to school, too.
His new school year starts
today.
He’s got a new bike.
His friends are on
their
way.
10
mins
3. School things
vocabulary:
-
Ask Ss to match the words
with the school things.
-
Play the recording.
-
Let Ss to practice saying the
names of school things.
-
Allow Ss to check their
answer in groups.
-
Individual
work
-
Whole class
-
Group work
3. Match the words with the
school things. Then listen
and repeat.
Key:
1 b 2 e 3 j
4 d 5 c 6 i
7 f 8 a 9 g
10 h
5
mins
-
Tell Ss to look around the
class. Ask what they see
around them/ what they have.
-
Let Ss to practice the words,
and make up the sentences
with the words it there is
time.
* Production:
4. What other things do you
have in your class?
Example:
Table, desk, noticeboard,
picture, flowers
5
mins
Post-
teach:
Post-teach:
Recall all the knowledge
2
mins
*Homework:
-
Write the items related to school in the book.
-
Prepare next lesson (A closer look 1)
School year: 2018-2019
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 14/8 /2017 Date of teaching:6A:19/8/2017
6D,E :8 /8 /2017
PERIOD 3:UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can pronounce correctly the sounds /əʊ/ and /ʌ/ in
isolation and in context.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the subjects in the school.
2.
Structures:
o
The present simple.
o
The combinations: to study, to have, to do, to play + Noun.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher
Students
Content
Tim
e
Pre-teach:
- Ask students to name
some subjects they learn.
- Whole
class
* Warm-up:
Subjects: 5
Math, music, English, mins
1. Listen and repeat the
words
-
Play the recording.
-
Play it again and pause
for Ss to repeat each word.
-
Correct Ss’ pronunciation.
-
Listen
-
Listen and
repeat
* Presentation:
Vocabulary
1. Listen and repeat the words
physics; exercise; English;
vocabulary; history; football; 5
homework; lessons; judo; mins
music; school lunch; science
While-
teach:
VOCABUL
ARY
2. Work in pairs. Put the
words in 1 into groups
- Ask Ss to put the words in
1 into groups.
- Pair-work
* Practice:
2. Work in pairs. Put the words
in 1 into groups.
Key:
- Explain to Ss which
play
football, music
words go with each verb.
do
homework, judo, exercise
have
school lunch, lessons
5
study
Physics, English, history,
mi
vocabulary, science.
ns
3. Put one of these words
in each blank
- Ask Ss to write on the
board, then check their
answers.
- Individual
work
3. Put one of these words in
each blank.
5
Key:
mins
1.
Homework
2.
Football
3.
Lessons
4.
Judo
School year: 2017-2018
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
5. Science
4. Write sentences about
yourself using the
combinations above
- Ask Ss to write sentences
about themselves in their
notebooks, using the
combinations above.
- Pair-work
4. Write sentences about
yourself using the combinations
above.
Example:
I/We have English lessons on
Tuesday and Thursday.
5
mins
5. Listen and repeat
- Ask Ss to practice the
sounds /əʊ/ and /ʌ/. Play
the recording and ask Ss to
listen and repeat.
- Listen and
repeat.
Pronunciation /əʊ/ and /ʌ/
5. Listen and repeat. Pay
attention to the sounds /əʊ/ and
/ʌ /
5
mins
6. Sort the words
-
Play the recording twice.
-
Let Ss check their
- Individual
work.
6. Listen to the words and put
them into two groups.
Key:
answers in groups.
/əʊ/
/ʌ /
5
While-
-
Call some Ss to write
their answers on the board.
-
Correct the mistakes.
rode
don’t
hope
homework
post
some
Monday
month
come
one
mins
teach:
PRONUNC
IATION
7. Listen, repeat &
underline the words.
-
Play the recording twice.
-
Help them to recognize
two sounds.
-
Ask ss to underline them
in the sentences.
-
Listen and
repeat
-
Individual
work
* Production:
7. Listen and repeat. Underline
the sounds /əʊ/ and /ʌ/ you
hear.
Key:
1.
They are going to open a new
library.
2.
I’m coming home from
school.
3.
His brother eats lunch in the
school canteen.
4.
The new school year starts
next month.
5.
My brother is doing his
homework.
6.
He goes to the judo club
every Sunday.
5
mins
Post-teach:
Recall all the knowledge
5
mins
*Homework:- Learn vocabulary by heart.- Prepare next lesson (A closer look 2)
Date of planning: 18/8 /2017 Date of teaching:6A,E :22 /8 /2017
6D:21/8/2017
School year: 2017-2018
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
PERIOD 4:UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use the present simple and the present continuous.
II.
Language Focus:
Structures:
o
The present simple and present continuous tense.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher
Students
Content
Time
Pre-teach:
- Have Ss to play a game.
- Group
work
* Warm-up:
Noughts and Crosse:
Ex: She often plays chess after
school.
5
mins
While-teach:
-
Ask Ss to give the rule and
use of the present simple and
the present continuous tense
themselves.
-
Let them study the grammar
box.
-
Give more examples if
necessary.
- Listen
- Listen and
repeat
* Presentation:
Grammar
The present simple
Positive:
I/ you/ we/ they + V(work, study)
He/ she /it + V-s/ V-es.(works,
studies)
Negative:
I/ you/ we/ they + don’t / do not
+ V
He/ she /it + doesn’t/ does not +
V
Questions and short answer:
Do I/ you/ we/ they + V?
Yes, I/ you/ we/ they do.
No, I/ you/ we/ they don’t.
Does He/ she /it + V?
Yes, He/ she /it + does.
No, He/ she /it + doesn’t.
5
mins
* Practice:
1. Write the correct form of
the verbs
-
Let Ss to do the task
individually.
-
Correct their answers.
2. Correct the sentences.
- Allow Ss to write
the
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
Key:
1. has 2. do you have
3.love
4. does vy walk 5. ride 6.
teaches 7. doesn’t play 8.
reads 9. go 10. do
2. Correct the sentences
according to the information in
5
mins
5
School year: 2017-2018
play
like
read
listen
do
visit
make
watch
cook
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
sentences in their notebooks,
- Pair-work
(1) above.
mins
referring to the interview.
Key:
- Call 1 or 2 Ss to write on the
1. Duy lives near here.
board, check their
answers
2. Duy likes/loves his new
sentence by sentence.
school.
3. Vy and Duy ride to school.
4. Mr Quang teaches Duy
English.
5. At break time, Phong reads
in the library.
3. Make questions then
3. Make questions
then
interview your partner.
5
interview your partner.
Key:
mins
- Ask Ss to take turns to ask
1. Do you ride your bike to
questions and give answers.
school?
- Go around and correct their
2. Do you read in the library at
mistakes or give help when
the break time?
necessary.
3. Do you like your new
school?
4. So your friends go to school
with you?
5. So you do your homework
after school?
4. Fill and underline the
- Individual
4. Fill and underline the present
5
present continuous form
work.
continuous form.
mins
- Ask Ss to refer to
the
The present continuous:
conversation in
Getting
Positive:
started. Focus on the verbs
S + to be + Ving.
used in the
present
Negative:
continuous.
S + to be not+ Ving.
- Ask Ss to listen and follow
Questions and short answer:
the conversation on page 6
To be + S + Ving?
(twice).
Yes, S + to be
- Ask Ss to underline the
No, S + to be not.
present continuous form.
5. Complete the sentences
- Group-
5. Complete the sentences with
5
- Have Ss study the example
work
the correct form of the verbs.
mins
first.
Key:
- Ask Ss to give the correct
1. Am not playing
form of the verbs.
2. Are studying
- Ask Ss to say why to use the
3. Aren’t doing
School year: 2017-2018
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
tense in each sentence.
6. Choose the correct tense
of the verbs
-
Ask Ss to choose the correct
tense of the verbs.
-
Ask Ss to discuss any
common errors and provide
further practice if necessary.
7. Read Vy’s email to her
friend.
-
Ask Ss to underline things
that often happen or are fixed.
Then underline things that are
happening now.
-
Help Ss to compare Vy’s
first week with their
individually.
-
Correct the mistakes
-
Group
work
-
Group-
work
- Individual
work
4.
Am having
5.
Are riding
6.
Choose the correct tense of
the verbs.
Key:
1.
Are having
2.
Wears
3.
Starts
4.
Is watching
5. Are skipping
7. Read Vy’s email to her
friend.
Compare Vy’s first week with
yours.
Ex:
Both Vy and I are having an
interesting first week.
I wear my uniform every day,
but Vy wears her uniform only
on Mondays and Saturday.
5
mins
Post-teach
Recall all the knowledge
5
mins
*Homework:
- Prepare next lesson (Communication)
School year: 2017-2018
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 19/8 /2017 Date of teaching:6A,D,E :23 /8 /2017
PERIOD 5:UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Lesson 4: Communication
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use appropriate questions when making new friends
at a new school.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: pocket money, remember, share, help, classmate.
2.
Structures: The present simple tense.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pieces of paper.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher
Students
Content
Time
Pre-teach:
-
Have Ss guess the meaning
of the vocabulary.
-
Tell Ss that this vocabulary
will appear in the task that
follow.
-
Ask Ss how they often
make friends, what they
often say when they first
meet a new friends, what
questions they often ask, etc.
-
Whole class
-
Answer
* Presentation:
Guess the meaning of the
vocabulary:
-
pocket money(n):
-
remember(v):
-
share(v):
-
help (v):
-
classmate(n):
5
mins
1. Game: Making friend
-
Ask Ss to read and tick the
questions.
-
Allow Ss to discuss in
groups.
-
Ask Ss why or why not
they ticked this or that
question.
-
Allow Ss some time to
write questions on a piece of
paper, share them with the
class or group.
- Group-work
1. Game: Making friend.
Read and tick
the
questions
you think
are
suitable to
ask a
new
friends at school
School year: 2017-2018
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
While-
teach:
2. Survey:
-
Ask Ss to give the qualities
of a good friend in class
(adjectives). They can give
as many words as possible.
-
Divide class into groups of
4 or 5. Ss take turns to
interview the other
members, using the
questions.
-
Encourage Ss to give nice
sentences about friendship
Presentation:
-
Choose some Ss to present
to the class about their good
friends and why they are
good friends. (avoid talking
about someone who is
considered not a good
friend”).
-
Whole class
-
Group-work
-
Whole class
2. There is a quiz for
students in the new school
newsletter. Read the
questions.
Example: Friendly,
generous, helpful,
cheerful, humorous, kind,
reserved
Example:
“Friends are forever”
Present to the class about
your good friends and why
they are good friends.
35
mins
Post-teach
Recall all the knowledge
5
mins
*Homework:
-
Learn new vocabulary and questions to make friends.
-
Prepare next lesson: (Skills 1)
School year: 2017-2018
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 20/8 /2017 Date of teaching:6D,E :24/8 /2017
6A:26/8/2017
Period 6:UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Lesson 5: Skills 1
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can read and talk about school activities, subjects, and
what Ss do at school.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: boarding, surrounded, international, creative
2.
Structures: The present simple tense.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pieces of paper.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher
Students
Content
Tim
e
Pre-teach:
Check the previous lesson’s
knowledge
Answer
questions
5
mins
While-
1. Read the text quickly to
- Whole class
* Presentation:
30
check your ideas
Look at the picture.
- Ask the class to look at the
What do they tell you about
three pictures first.
the school?
- Encourage Ss to give their
(pictures on page 22)
ideas (as many sentences as
Reading
possible).
1. Read the text quickly to
check your ideas
- Ask Ss to read the three
- Individual
passages quickly and check
work
their ideas. Set a strict time
* Practice:
limit to ensure Ss read
2. Now find these words in the
teach:
quickly for information.
text. What do they mean?
READIN
- It is a boarding school. That
mins
G
2. Now find these words in
means many Ss study and live
the text. What do they
there.
mean?
- The school is surrounded by
- Ask Ss to read the passages
- Pair-work
mountains and green fields.
again, then find the words in
- international school
the passages.
for Ss from year 1 to year 2,
- Help them to give the
Ss learn English with foreign
meaning of the words, or
teachers…
explanations, or examples, or
(inter + national)
Vietnamese equivalent.
- Some creative students do
- Tell Ss to pay attention to
drawings and paintings in the
the context of the words
art club.
3. Now read the text again
3. Complete these sentences
and complete these sentences.
- Set a longer time limit for
Key:
Ss to reread the text and
- Boarding
School year: 2017-2018
10
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
While-
teach:
SPEAKIN
G
complete the sentences.
-
Ask Ss to note where they
found the information that
help them complete the
sentences.
-
Have Ss to compare their
answer.
-
Allow Ss to read in chorus
once. Then call some
individuals to read aloud to
the class. Check their
pronunciation and intonation.
4. Fill in the table
-
Ask Ss to refer back the
three schools. Give the
background of the schools.
-
Ask Ss to complete the table
in their notebooks.
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
-
Vinabrita
-
Australia
-
Mountains
-
English speaking teachers.
Speaking
4. Which school would you
like to go to? Why? First
complete the table. Then
discuss with your friends.
Background of the school:
PLC Sydney: an international
school for girls from
kindergarten to year 12 in
Sydney, Australia.
An Lac Lower Secondary
School: a small school in a
mountainous region in Son
Dong Dist, Bac Giang
Province.
Vinabrita School: an
international school for from
year 1 to year 12 in Ha Noi.
Post-
teach:
-
Divide the class into groups
of 4 or 5, let them discuss
their answers to the
questions, and give reasons.
-
Ask some Ss to talk to the
class, then the class give their
comments on their friends’
content, pronunciation,
fluency, language, body
language, etc.
- Group-work
* Production:
Discuss:
- Which school (among the
three above) would you like to
go? Why?
10
mins
*Homework:
-
Practice speaking more.
-
Prepare next lesson: (Skill 2)
Date of planning: 25/8 /2017
School year: 2017-2018
11
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of teaching:6A,E :29 /8 /2017 6D: 28/8 /2017
PERIOD7:UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Lesson 6: Skills 2
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can listen to get information about school activities and
write a webpage for their school, using correct punctuation.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: webpage, punctuation.
2.
Structures: The present simple and present continuous tense.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, poster.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Time
Pre-teach
- Ask Ss to refer back to
the reading : PLC Sydney
and answer.
- Whole class
* Presentation:
Questions:
-
Give the full name of the
PLC Sydney School.
-
Do you like PLC Sydney
school?
Why? Why not?
5
mins
While-teach
-
Play the recording. Ask
Ss to listen only the first
time. Then play the
recording again and allow
Ss to choose the correct
answers as they listen.
-
Allow Ss share their
answers before listening to
the recording a final time
to check.
-
Tell the class the
importance of punctuation
marks. Allow some time
for the Ss to study the
writing tip. Explain to Ss
the new words and
punctuation marks.
-
Ask Ss to correct the
punctuation in the
sentences in their
notebooks.
-
Individual
work
-
Whole class
-
Individual
work
* Practice:
Listening
1.
Susie is a student at PLC
Sydney. Listen and choose
the correct answer.
Key:
1.
A
2. A
3. B 4. B
5. A
Writing
A webpage for school
Writing Tip good
punctuation.
2. Can you correct the
punctuation in these
sentences?
Key:
1.
School starts on the 5
th
September.
2.
Does he live in Ha Noi?
3.
I’m excited about the
first day of school.
4.
Are you doing your
homework?
10
mins
10
mins
School year: 2017-2018
12
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
-
Call 5 Ss to write the 5
sentences on the board.
-
Let the class comment
and check.
-
Give correction.
-
Play the recording twice.
Let Ss write the words in
the correct places.
-
Allow Ss to refer back to
the reading for useful
language, and note
interesting expressions and
language on the board.
-
Show a webpage to
inspire Ss.
-
Tell Ss to write a draft
first, trying to answer all
the questions.
-
Ask Ss to write a
paragraph of about 80
words about their school.
5. We’re having an English
lesson in class.
3.
Can you correct the
passage? Write the correct
version.
Key:
Hi, I’m Phong and I’m from
Ho Chi Minh City. I wear
my uniform to school every
day. My favourite teacher is
Mr Trung. He teaches me
science.
4.
Create a webpage for
your school.
10
mins
Post-teach
-
Choose some Ss to
present to the class about
their writing.
-
Tell Ss to pay attention to
punctuation, structure
elements, linking words,
etc.
-
Give correction.
- Whole class
* Production:
Present to the class about
their writing.
10
mins
*Homework:
-
Write a paragraph in your notebook.
-
Prepare next lesson
School year: 2017-2018
13
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 26/8/2017 Date of teaching:6A,D,E : 30/8/2017
PERIOD8:UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Lesson 7: Looking Back
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can review all what they have learnt in this unit.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: webpage, punctuation.
2.
Structures:
The present simple and present continuous tense.
Verb (study, have, do, play) + Noun
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, poster.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Time
Pree-teach
-
Tell Ss to write the words
in their notebooks. Then T
corrects the mistakes.
-
Let Ss repeat the words.
-
Check their pronunciation
-
Have Ss match the words
in A with ones in B.
-
Individual
work
- Repeat
-
Individual
work
* Presentation:
Vocabulary
1. Write words that match the
pictures.
Key:
1.
Dictionary
2.
Uniform
3.
Pencil sharpener
4.
Notebook
5.
Compass
6.
Calculator
2. Match the words in A with
the ones in B
Key:
1. B 2. C 3. A 4. D
5
mins
While-teach
-
Play the recording twice.
Let Ss write the words in
the correct places.
-
Give correction.
-
Ask Ss to do these
exercises (4, 5, 6) in
individually first. Then
they can check their
answers with a partner
before discussing the
answers as a class.
-
Tell Ss to keep a record
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
-
Pair - work
* Practice:
3. Listen. Then write down the
words you hear in the correct
places.
Key:
- Play: sport, badminton, music.
-
Do: morning exercise,
homework.
-
Study: new words, geography.
-
Have: English lessons, a new
book.
Grammar
4. Complete the sentences with
the present simple.
Key:
1. Comes 2. Don’t 3. Walks
4. Do 5. Teaches 6. Play
10
mins
10
mins
School year: 2017-2018
14
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
of their original answers so
they can use that
information in their Now
you can… statements.
-
Ask Ss to read the
questions and answers once
or twice, then match them.
-
Have Ss write all the
sentences in their
notebooks.
- Individual
work
5. Complete the sentences with
the present continuous.
Key:
1. are doing 2. Are riding
3.
is studying
4.
is having
5.
am walking
6.
is teaching
6. Complete the text with the
correct form of the verbs in
brackets.
Key:
1. live 2. is 3. has
4. is walking 5. go 6. Study
7. are working 8. loves
Communication
7. Match the questions with the
correct answers.
Key:
b g d f e a h c
10
mins
Post-teach
-
Ask Ss work in pairs and
role play the questions and
answers.
-
Ask Ss to complete the
self- assessment. Identify
and difficulties and weak
areas and provide further
practice.
- Pair - work
* Production:
8. Now role play the questions
and answers.
Finished! Now you can…
10
mins
*Homework:
-
Show more examples of the different types of school if possible.
-
Prepare next lesson
Date of planning: 3/9/2017 Date of teaching:6A,D,E :6 /9/2017
School year: 2017-2018
15
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
PERIOD 9: UNIT 2: MY HOME
Lesson 1: Getting Started - A look inside
I.
Objectives:By the end of this lesson, students can know the key language and structures to
be learnt in this unit.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My home”.
2.
Structures:
There is / There isn’t
There are / There aren’t
Prepositions of place.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, picture.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’
Activities
Content
T
Pre-
teach
-
Ask Ss to guess what the
picture might show or what the
conversation might be about.
-
Ask Ss questions about the
picture.
-
Ask Ss to share any recent
experiences of chatting online.
-
Ask Ss to talk a bit about the
place where you live.
T- Whole
class
* Presentation:
Guess what the picture might show
or what the conversation might be
about.
Ex:
-
What are Nick and Mi doing?
(talking on Skype; Skype = a
system that allows you to make
telephone calls using your
computer and the internet).
-
Talk a bit about the place where
you live.
5’
While-
teach
-
Play the recording
-
Ask Ss to give the answers
without reading the conversation
again.
-
Ask Ss to read the conversation
and check their answers.
Confirm the correct answers.
-
Have Ss work independently.
Allow them to share answers
before discussing as class.
-
Ask Ss to write the correct
answers on the board.
-
Ask Ss if they know the
prepositions in the box.
-
Have Ss do exercise 2 in pairs.
-
Ask for Ss’ answers.
- Listen
and read
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
* Practice:
1.
Listen and read
a.
Which family members does Mi
talk about?
Key:
b.
Read the conversation again.
Complete the sentences.
Key:
1.
TV; sofa 2. Town house
3. sitting on the sofa 4. noisy
5. three
2. Match the prepositions with the
10’
School year: 2017-2018
16
Grandparents
Dad
Mum
Brother
Uncle
Aunt
Cousin
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
-
Ask Ss to write the sentences
individually, then share the
sentences with a friend.
-
Call on some Ss to write their
answer on the board.
-
Check the sentences with the
whole class.
-
Ask Ss to look at the picture of
the room and do exercise
individually.
-
Have Ss share their answers
before giving the answer.
-
Confirm the correct answers.
- Pair-work
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
- Pair-work
pictures.
Key:
A. on B. next to C. behind
D. in E. in front of
F. between G. under
3. Write a sentence to describe
each picture in 2.
Key:
A.
The dog is on the chair
B.
The dog is next to the bowl.
C.
The cat is behind the TV.
D.
The cat is in the wardrobe.
E.
The dog is in front of the kennel.
F.
The cat is between the lamp and
the sofa.
G.
The cat is under the table.
4. Write true of false for each
sentence. Correct the false ones.
Key:
1.
F (The dog is between the
bookshelf and the bed).
2.
T
3.
F (The clock is between the
pictures).
4.
F (The cat is in front of the
kennel).
5.
F (The cap is next to the pillow).
6.
T
10’
10’
Post-
teach
-
Ask Ss to look at the picture
and answer the questions.
-
Correct their answers
- Pair-work
* Production:
5. Look at the picture again.
Answer the questions.
Key:
1.
They are on the desk.
2.
They are on the floor.
3.
Yes, it is.
4.
No, they aren’t.
5.
It’s behind the bookshelf.
6.
No, it isn’t.
10’
*Homework:
-
Write the answer in your notebook.
-
Prepare next lesson
School year: 2017-2018
17
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 4/9/2017 Date of teaching:6A :9 /9/2017
6A,E:7/9/2017
PERIOD 10:UNIT 2: MY HOME
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can pronounce correctly the sounds /z/, /s/ and /iz/ in
isolation and in context.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My home”.
2.
Structures:
There is / There isn’t
There are / There aren’t
Prepositions of place.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, picture.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’Activities
Content
T
Pre-teach
-
Have Ss quickly match
the room with its name.
-
Explain the meaning of
“hall”.
-
Quickly check the
answers.
- Individual
work
* Presentation:
Vocabulary
1. Name the rooms of the house.
kitchen
hall
bedroom bathroom
living room attic
5’
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to work in pairs
to do this activity.
-
Write the name of the
room on the board, in
different places. Call on
Ss from different pairs to
go to the board and write
the name of the furniture
under these rooms.
-
Ask Ss to comment.
-
Play the recording.
-
Ask Ss to listen and
repeat the words.
-
Ask for more words for
each group.
-
Model this activity with
a Ss.
-
Pair-work
-
Listen and
repeat.
-
Pair-work
* Practice:
2.
Name the things in each room in 1
Key:
3.
Listen and repeat the words. Can
you add more words to the list.
(page 34)
4.
Think of a room. In pairs, ask and
answer questions to guess the room.
Example:
A: What’s in the room?
B: A sofa and a television.
A: Is it the living room?
10’
10’
School year: 2017-2018
18
Livin
g
room
Lamp, sofa, picture, table.
Bedro
om
Bed, lamp, picture, chest
of drawers.
Kitch
en
Bridge, cupboard, cooker,
table, dishwasher, chair.
Hall
Picture
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
-
Ask Ss to work in pairs.
-
Call some pairs to
practice in front of the
class.
-
Have Ss to read out the
words first.
-
Play the recording for Ss
to listen and repeat the
words.
-
Pay attention to the
sound:
/z/, /s/ and /iz/
-
Ask Ss to put the words
in the correct column
while they listen.
-
Have Ss comment on the
way to pronounce s/-es
at the end of the words.
Quickly explain the rules.
-
Ask Ss to do this
exercise individually first
then compare their
answers with a partner.
Check Ss’answers.
-
Ask Ss to explain their
answers.
- Whole
class
- Individual
work
B: Yes.
Pronunciation
/z/, /s/ and /iz/
5.
Listen and repeat the words.
Lamp
posters sinks
Fridge tables
toilets
Beds
wardrobes
6.
Listen again and put the words in
the correct column.
-
Final s is pronounced /z/ after
voiced sounds (/b/, /d/, /g/, /n/, /m/,
/l/...) and any vowel sounds.
-
Final s is pronounced /s/ after
voiceless sounds (/t/, /p/, /g/, /k/, /f/,
/θ/).
-
Final es is pronounced /iz/ after
voiced sounds (/s/, /z/, /, /tʃ/, /ʤ/).
7. Read the conversation below.
Underline the final s/es in the words
and write /z/, /s/ or /iz/.
/z/: things, pictures
/s/: lights, chopsticks
/iz/: dishes, vases
10’
Post-teach
-
Play the recording for Ss
to repeat each line of the
conversation.
-
Ask Ss to practice in
pair.
- Pair-work
* Production:
8. Listen to the conversation and
repeat. Pay attention to /z/, /s/ and
/iz/ at the end of the words. Then
practice the conversation with a
partner.
10’
*Homework:
-
Learn vocabulary by heart.
-
Prepare next lesson
School year: 2017-2018
19
/z/
/s/
/iz/
Posters
Tables
Wardrobe
s
Beds
Lamps
Sinks
Toilets
Fridges
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 8/9/2017 Date of teaching:6A,E : 12/9/2017
6D: 11/9/2017
PERIOD 11:UNIT 2: MY HOME
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use There is/ There isn’t/ There are/ There aren’t
correctly and appropriately.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My home”.
2.
Structures:
There is / There isn’t
There are / There aren’t
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
T
Pre-
teach
- Have Ss to play a
game.
- Group work
* Warm-up:
Noughts and Crosse:
Ex: The cupboard is in the kitchen.
5’
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to look at the
pictures of the two
rooms in the grammar.
Ask Ss what the second
room doesn’t have.
-
Ask Ss to use the
There is/ There are
structure to make
sentences.
-
Elicit the forms
(positive, negative,
questions and short
answers) from the Ss.
-
Have Ss a closer look
at the grammar box,
especially the example.
- Whole class
* Presentation:
Grammar
There is / There isn’t
There are / There aren’t
Positive:
Singular: There’s (is) a picture on the
wall.
Plural: There are two lamps in the room.
Negative:
Singular: There isn’t a picture on the
wall.
Plural: There aren’t two lamps in the
room.
Questions and short answer:
Singular:
-
Is there a picture on the wall?
-
Yes, there is. / No, there isn’t.
Plural:
-
Are there two lamps in the room?
-
Yes, there are. / No, there aren’t.\
10’
10’
While-
teach
- Ask Ss to do exercise
1 and 2 quickly then
give the answers to T.
- Individual
work
* Practice:
1.
Write is or are.
2.
Make the sentences in 1 negative.
Key:
10’
School year: 2017-2018
20
cupboard
sinks
lamp
bedroom
posters
kitchen
bathroom
window
wall
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
-
Have Ss to write the
sentences individually
then go to the board to
write their sentences.
-
Ask Ss to look at the
picture and complete the
description.
-
Confirm the correct
answers and write them
on the board.
-
Have Ss do this
exercise individually,
then give their answers.
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
-
Individual
work
-
Pair - work
1. is/ isn’t 2. Are/ aren’t
3. are/ aren’t 4. Is/ isn’t
5. are/ aren’t
3. Write positive and negative sentences.
Key:
1.
There is/ isn’t a TV next to/ on the
table.
2.
There is/ isn’t a brown dog in the
kitchen.
3.
There is/ isn’t a boy in front of the
cupboard.
4.
There is/ isn’t a bath in the bathroom.
5.
There are/ aren’t lamps in the
bedroom.
4. Write is / isn’t / are / aren’t in each
blank to describe the kitchen in Mi’s
house.
Key:
1. is 2. is 3. are
4.
are
5. aren’t 6. isn’t
5.
Complete the questions.
Key:
1.
Is there a fridge in your kitchen?
2.
Is there a TV in your bedroom?
3.
Are there four chairs in your living
room?
4.
Is there a desk next to your bed?
5.
Are there two sinks in your
bathroom?
6. In pairs, ask and answer the questions
in 5. Report your partner’s answer to
the class.
-
Model the
conversation with a Ss
before Ss do this in
pairs.
-
Call some pairs act out
he conversation in front
of the whole group.
- Pair - work
* Production:
7. Work in pair. Ask your partner about
his/ her room or the room he/ she likes
best in the house.
10’
*Homework:- Prepare next lesson
School year: 2017-2018
21
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 9/9/2017 Date of teaching:6A,D,E :13 /9/2017
PERIOD 12:UNIT 2: MY HOME
Lesson 4: Communication
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use ask about and describe houses, rooms and
furniture.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: town house, country house, villa, stilt house, apartment.
2.
Structures:
There is / There isn’t
There are / There aren’t
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Time
Pre-teach
-
Have Ss look at extra
vocabulary.
-
Ask Ss to look at the
picture and complete the
sentences.
- Whole class
- Pair-work
* Presentation:
Extra vocabulary:
o Town house
o
Country house
o
Villa
o
Stilt house
o
Apartment
1. Look at the picture of
Mi’s grandparents’
house and complete the
sentences.
Key:
1. country 2. Are
3. Is 4. Are
5.On
6. Next to
7. on 8. is
5’
While-teach
-
Model the way do do
this exercise with a St.
-
Ask Ss in each pairs not
to look at each other’s
picture and to make
similar conversations.
-
Ask Ss to note down the
differences between the
two houses.
-
Ask some pairs to act
out the conversation.
-
Ask other pairs listen
and add more differences
if there are any.
-
Pair-work
-
Individual
work
-
Pair -work
* Practice:
2. Find the differences
between the two houses.
Example:
A: Nick lives in a country
house. Where does Mi
live?
B: Mi lives in a town
house.
Suggested questions:
A: How many rooms are
there in Mi’s house?
B: There are six rooms.
What about Nick’s
house? How many room
are there…?
10’
10’
School year: 2017-2018
22
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
-
Give Ss 5 7 minutes to
draw a simple plan of
their house.
-
Have Ss work in pairs to
tell each other about their
house.
-
Ask Ss to note down the
differences between their
houses.
3. Draw a simple plan of
your house. Tell your
partner about your
house.
10’
-
Call on some Ss to
describe their friend’s
house to the class.
-
Let Ss present the
differences between their
house and their friend’s.
-
Ask Ss listen and give
comments.
- Whole class
* Production:
4. Describe your friend’s
house to the class.
10’
*Homework:
-
Write a paragraph to describe your house in your notebook.
-
Prepare next lesson
School year: 2017-2018
23
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 10/9/2017 Date of teaching:6A :16 /9/2017
6D:18/9 ; 6E:19/9/2017
PERIOD 13:UNIT 2: MY HOME
Lesson 5: Skills 1
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can read for specific information about rooms and houses;
describe houses, rooms and furniture.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My home”.
2.
Structures:
There is / There isn’t
There are / There aren’t
Prepositions of place.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Time
Pre-teach
-
Ask the class to look
at the Study skills
Reading”.
-
Explain any words
that Ss do not know.
-
Ask Ss to quickly
look at the text and
answer the questions.
-
Confirm the answers
to questions 1 and 2.
Answers to question 3
are open.
-
Ask Ss to quickly
read the text and check
their ideas from 1.
- Whole class
- Answer
* Presentation:
Study skills Reading
Prediction
-
Predicting makes
reading easy.
-
Before reading, look at
the picture, design and
title.
-
Decide what is the topic
of the text.
-
Think about what you
know about the topic.
Reading
1. Answer the questions
Key:
1.
It’s an email.
2.
The title is “A room at
the Crazy House Hotel,
Da Lat” The topic is
Nick’s weekend at the
Crazy House Hotel.
5’
While-teach
-
Ask Ss to read the
text in detail to answer
the questions.
-
Set a strict time limit
to ensure Ss read
- Individual
work
* Practice:
3. Read the text again
and answer the questions.
Key:
1.
No, he isn’t.
2.
There are ten rooms.
10’
School year: 2017-2018
24
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
quickly for
information.
-
Have Ss compare
their answer before
giving the answers.
-
Ask Ss to give
evidence when giving
the answers.
-
Ask Ss to do exercise
4. Then compare their
answers.
-
Correct their answers.
-
Have each St create a
new room for the hotel
and draw a plan of the
room.
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
3.
Because there’s a big
tiger on the wall.
4.
It’s under the bed.
4. Are these things in the
room?
Key:
o
A window
o
A lamp
o A tiger
o A chef
o A desk
Speaking
5. Create a new room for
the hotel. Draw a plan of
the room.
10’
10’
Post-teach
-
Ask Ss to show the
plan to a partner. Then
ask Ss to describe their
room in pair.
-
Ask other Ss to listen
and vote for the best
plan.
- Pair -work
* Production:
6. Show your plan to your
partner then describe the
room to other Ss in the
class.
10’
*Homework:
-
Prepare the next lesson
School year: 2017-2018
25
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
26
Date of planning: 16/9/2017 Date of teaching:6A: 19 /9/2017
6D,E:20/09/2017
PERIOD 14:UNIT 2: MY HOME
Lesson 6: Skills 2
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can listen to get information about rooms and houses;
write an e-mail to a friend.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My home”.
2.
Structures:
There is / There isn’t
There are / There aren’t
Prepositions of place.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, a large-sized piece of paper.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Time
Pre-teach
- Ask Ss to took at the plan
of the room and furniture on
page 23; Ask them to put
the furniture in the place
they like.
- Group-work
* Presentation:
Look at the picture. Put the
furniture in the place you
like.
The room at a hotel.
Furniture: fireplace,
wardrobe, table, bed,
shelf, stool, sofa.
5’
While-teach
-
Play the recording. Ask Ss
to draw the furniture in the
correct place as they listen.
-
Allow Ss share their
answers before listening to
the recording a final time to
check.
-
Correct their answer.
-
Ask Ss to describe Nick’
parents’ room again.
-
Ask Ss to read the Writing
tips box. Explain anything
Ss do not understand.
-
Ask them several
questions.
-
Copy a sample of an e-
mail and show Ss each part.
- Individual
work
- Whole class
- Answer
* Practice:
Listening
1. Listen and draw the
furniture in the correct
place.
Writing
An e-mail to a friend
Writing Tip How to write
an e-mail to a friend.
- Questions:
a.
How many parts are
there in an e-mail to your
friend?
b.
What are they?
c.
What should you
remember when writing
each part?
10’
10’
School year: 2017-2018
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
-
Ask Ss to look at Nick’s
email on page 22 and
identify the parts in the
email.
-
Check and confirm the
correct answer.
-
Use this e-mail as a model
to teach the e-mail parts.
-
Ask Ss to do this exercise
in pairs.
-
Write the email on a large-
sized piece of paper and ask
Ss to go to the board to do
this exercise.
-
Correct their answers.
-
Ask Ss to close their
books. Tell Ss that in this
writing section, they will
follow the writing process.
Write the three letters P, D
and C on the board and ask
them to guess what these
letters stand for.
-
Have Ss open their book to
check their guess. Explain
the process of writing again.
Ask Ss to look at the plan of
the room they created in the
previous lesson.
- Individual
work.
- T whole
class
2.
Read Nick’s e-mail
again. Identify the subject,
greeting, introduction,
body and conclusion of the
e-mail.
3.
Read the e-mail below
and correct it. Write the
correct version in the
provided.
4.
Write an e-mail to Nick.
Tell him about your idea
for the new room of the
Crazy House Hotel.
10’
Post-teach
-
Ask Ss to write their e-
mail individually. Ask one
St to write the e-mail on the
board. Other Ss and T
comment on the e-mail.
-
Collect some e-mail to
correct at home.
- Individual
work
* Production:
Write an email to Nick
10’
*Homework:
-
Write your e-mail in your notebook.
-
Prepare next lesson
School year: 2017-2018
27
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 17/9/2017 Date of teaching:6A: 20 /9/2017
6D,E:21/09/2017
PERIOD 15:UNIT 2: MY HOME
Lesson 7: Looking Back
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can review all what they have learnt in this unit.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My home”.
2.
Structures:
There is / There isn’t
There are / There aren’t
Prepositions of place.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’
Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-teach
-
Tell Ss to write the
words in their notebooks.
Then T corrects the
mistakes.
-
Let Ss repeat the words.
-
Check their
pronunciation
-
Have Ss match the
words in A with ones in
B.
-
Individual
work
- Repeat
-
Individual
work
* Presentation:
Vocabulary
1. Put The words into the correct
groups. Do you want to add any
words to each group?
Key:
-
Type of building: villa,
apartment, town house, stilt
house, country house.
-
Rooms: Living room: living
room, hall, bath room, kitchen,
attic.
-
Furniture: picture, cupboard,
chest of drawers, wardrobe, sofa,
dishwasher, desk.
5’
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to look at the
pictures and do exercise
individually.
-
Ask some Ss to write the
sentences on the board.
-
Correct Ss’ answers.
-
Ask Ss to do exercise 3
individually.
-
Have Ss compare their
answers with a partner.
-
Check their answers.
-
Ask Ss to do exercise 4
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
* Practice:
Grammar
2. Make sentences. Use
appropriate prepositions of
places.
Key:
1.
The boy is on the table.
2.
The dog is in front of the
kennel.
3.
The cat is between the
bookshelf and the sofa.
4.
The cat is behind the computer.
5.
The girl is in the armchair.
6.
The boy is next to the armchair.
3. Look at the picture and
complete the sentences.
Key:
10’
10’
School year: 2017-2018
28
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
individually.
-
Have Ss compare their
answers with a partner.
-
Ask some Ss to write the
sentences on the board.
-
Correct their answers.
-
Model a way to ask and
answer with a student,
then divide Ss into
groups.
-
Ask Ss to take turns to
draw a cat in the house in
the book. Other Ss ask
questions to find the cat.
-
Go around and obverse
Ss working.
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
- Group-
work
1. There is 2. There are
3. There is 4. There aren’t
5. There is 6. There aren’t
4. Turn the sentences in 3 into
questions.
Key:
1.
Is there a clock on the wall.
2.
Are there books on the
bookshelf?
3.
Is there a desk next to the
bookshelf?
4.
Are there two posters on the
wall?
5.
Is there a laptop and a lamp on
the desk?
6.
Are there three small plants in
the corner?
5.
Write six sentences to describe
your bedroom.
Communication
6.
Take turns to draw a cat in the
house below. Other students ask
questions to find the cat.
Example:
A: Where is the cat?
B: Is it on the bed?
A: No, it isn’t.
C: Is it under the table?
A: Yes, it is.
10’
Post-teach
- Ask Ss to complete the
self-assessment. Identify
any difficulties and weak
areas and provide further
practice.
- Individual
work
* Production:
Complete the self-assessment.
Finished! Now you can…
10’
*Homework:
- Prepare next lesson
Date of planning:22/9/2017 Date of teaching:6D: 25/9/2017
6A,E:26/9/2017
School year: 2017-2018
29
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Period 16: RIVISION
UNIT 1+2
I.
The aims:
Review is to revise the language Ss have studied and the skills they have practiced since
Unit 1.
II.
Language Focus:
-
Vocabulary:school things, types of house/room/furniture
-
Structures: +Present simple tense, present continuous tense
+There is/there are + Preposition of place
Use the language review as a self-test .Ss do exercises then check their answers
III.
Teaching ads: Lesson plan, chalk , ….
V. Procedures:
T’activities
Ss’activities
content
1.Pronunciation:
S
Sounds: /əʊ/ and /ʌ/
-Ask ss to do ex 1
- Correct
2. Vocabulary &
Grammar:
*Review:
+Present simple tense,
present continuous
tense
+There is/there are
+ Preposition of place
-Ask ss to do
ex 2,3
-Correct
3.Writing
-Ask ss to do ex 4,6
Individual
Ex1. Find the word which has a different sound in
part underlined.
1/ A. funny B. lunch C.
sun
D. computer
2/ A. photo B. going C. brother D. home
3/ A. school B. teaching C. chess D. chalk
4/ A. cold B. volleyball C. telephone D. open
Ex2. Choose the best option (A, B or C) to each space.
1.
Every morning, Lan always ...... to school at 6.30 and
...... home at about 11:30.
A.
go; come B. goes; comes C. go; comes
2.
While I ...... at school, my Dad ...... to the company.
A.
study; go B. am studying; is going C. study; is
going
3.
At break time, I ...... to the library and ...... books.
A.
read; go B. goes; reads C. go; read
4.
My sister usually ...... to school by bike, and my
mother ...... to work by motorbike.
A.
go; go B. goes; goes C. go; goes
Ex3. Put the verbs in brakets in the correct tense
form.
1. School (finish) ................. at 4.30 p.m every day.
2.
Listen! ......... they (sing) ............ in the classroom?
3.
...... you often (eat) ......... lunch in the school canteen?
Ex4. Write positive and nagative sentences with the
present simple or the present continuous.
1/ My friends / go to school by bus. (-)
2/ The library / open at 7:30 AM. (+)
3/ Students / have a break / right now. (-)
4/ I / study English / at the moment. (+)
Ex6. Complete each sentence so it means the same as
School year: 2017-2018
30
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
the sentences above.
1.
I have a bookshelf in my bedroom.
There ......
2.
We have a sink, a fridge, a cooker and a cupboard in
our kitchen.
There ......
4.
Homework.
-Do exercises in workbook
Test 15’
I.
Fill (am , is ,are ,don’t ) in each blank.(4ms)
1.
My sister ……………having breakfast now.
2.
They ……………happy .
3.
I ……… like coffe.
4.
I ………reading a book now.
II.
Choose the correct answer to complete the blanks by circling A,B,C orD.(3ms)
1.
At break time, I ........... to the library and ……..... books.
A.
read - go B. goes - reads C. go - read
2.
I usually .............. to school by bike, and my mother ............. to work by motorbike.
A.
go - go B. goes - goes C. go - goes
3.
Every morning, I always .......... to school at 6.30 and ......... home at about 11:30.
A.
go - come B. goes - comes C. go - comes
III.
Complete each sentence so it means the same as the sentence above.(3 ms)
1.
The bed is near the desk .
The desk.........................................................................................
2.
The dog is in front of the microwave.
The microwave................................................................................................
3.
The notebook is on the book.
The book ..........................................................................................
Date of planning:23/9/2017 Date of teaching:6A,D,E: 27/9/2017
School year: 2017-2018
31
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
PERIOD 17: UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 1: Getting Started
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can know the key language and structures to be learnt in
this unit.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My friends”.
2.
Structures:
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
The Present continuous for future.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, picture.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-teach
Write the Unit title on the
board “A surprise guess”.
Explain the meaning of
“surprise”.
-
Ask Ss to guess what the
picture might show or what
the conversation might be
about.
-
Ask Ss questions about the
picture.
-
Ask Ss to share any recent
- Whole
class
* Presentation:
Guess what the picture might
show or what the conversation
might be about.
Ex:
-
What is Phuc doing?
-
What are they eating and
drinking?
Share your recent experiences of
going on a picnic.
5’
While-
teach
-
Play the recording (twice)
-
Ask Ss to read the
conversation and check their
answers. Confirm the
correct answers.
-
Ask Ss to put a suitable
word in each blank.
-
Tell Ss to refer back to the
conversation to find the
phrases. Practice saying
them together.
-
Ask Ss to pay attention to
intonation when asking
questions.
-
Ask Ss to role-play the
short conversation before
demonstrating for the class.
-
Encourage Ss to extend the
conversation.
- Individual
work
- Individual
work
- Pair-work
* Practice:
1.
Listen and read
a.
Put a suitable word in each
blank.
Key:
1.
picnic
2. Likes
3. friendly 4. Mai and Chau
5.
glasses; long black hair
6.
working on their school
project.
b.
Polite requests and
suggestions. Put the words in the
correct order.
Key:
Making and responding to a
request:
1.
Can you pass the biscuits for
me, please?
2.
Yes, sure.
Making and responding to a
suggestion:
10’
School year: 2017-2018
32
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
-
Demonstrate the game to
the class first.
-
Ask Ss to play in pairs.
Monitor for any errors in
stress or intonation and
discuss after Ss have
finished playing the game.
-
Have Ss practice the
Adjectives.
-
Ask Ss to write the correct
adjectives in the gaps. Tell
Ss they will only need 5 of
the 10 adjectives to
complete this activity.
-
Play the recording to allow
Ss to check their answers.
-
Tell Ss look back at 3. Ask
what word comes after the
name. Make some more
sentences about the class
and write tem on the board.
Underline the forms of “be”.
-
Ask Ss to complete the
sentences.
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
-
Individual
work
1.
Would you like to sit down?
2.
Oh, sorry. We can’t.
2. Game: Lucky numbers
1.
pass the pen
2.
play outside
3.
move the chair
4.
listen to music
5.
turn on the lights.
6.
have a picnic.
Adjectives for personality
3.
Choose the adjectives in the
box to complete the sentences.
Key:
1.
create 2. Kind
3. confident 4. Talkative
5. clever
4.
Complete the sentences
Key:
1.
am 2. Is 3. Isn’t
4. aren’t 5. Is 6. Are
10’
10’
Post-teach
-
Ask Ss to look at the
picture and answer the
questions.
-
Correct their answers
- Group-
work
* Production:
5. Game: Friendship Flowers
In groups of four, each member
writes in the flowers petal two
adjectives for personalities
which you like about the others.
Compare and discuss which two
words best describe each person.
10’
*Homework:
-
Practice the conversation.
-
Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning:24/9/2017 Date of teaching:6D,E: 28/9/2017
6A:30/9/2017
PERIOD 17: UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
School year: 2017-2018
33
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can pronounce correctly the sounds /b/ and /p/ in isolation
and in context; use vocabulary and structures about body parts and appearance.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the vocabulary about body parts and appearance.
2.
Structures:
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
The Present continuous for future.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, flash cards.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Tim
e
Pre-
teach
-
Ask Ss to match the
words they know.
-
Allow Ss to work
together. Point out the
irregular using the watch
out” box. Play the
recording as many times
as required to support Ss
pronunciation.
-
Review and test Ss’
comprehension by asking
them to respond to
- Individual
work
* Presentation:
Vocabulary
Appearances
1. Match the words with the
pictures on the cover page of 4Teen
magazine.
Watch out!
Eye eyes
Tooth teeth
Hand hands
Foot -feet
5’
While-
teach
-
Explain that some words
go together, but some
don’t.
-
Write the adjectives on
the board and allow Ss to
attach vocabulary cards to
make matches.
-
Ask Ss to complete the
word webs in their books.
-
Play the recording.
-
Ask Ss to listen and
repeat the words.
-
Have Ss practice reading
the words first.
-
Play the recording for Ss
to listen and do the task.
-
Ask Ss to listen while T
play the recording.
-
Ask Ss to chant along.
Provide further practice
by dividing the class into
-
Individual
work
-
Listen and
repeat.
-
Pair-work
-
Whole class
-
Group-work
* Practice:
2. Create word webs.
Key:
-
Long/short: legs, arms, tail, hair.
-
Big/small: head, ears, feet, eyes,
nose.
-
Black/blonde/curly/straight: hair,
fur.
-
Chubby: face, cheeks.
-
Round/long: face.
Pronunciation /b/ and /p/
3.
Listen and repeat (page 28)
Picnic biscuit blonde
black big
patient
4.
Listen and circle the words you
hear.
Key:
1.
play
2. band 3. Ponytail
4. brown 5. Picnic 6. pretty
5. Listen. The practice the chant.
Notice the rhythm.
Grammar
10’
School year: 2017-2018
34
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
2 groups. Have groups
sing alternate lines.
-
Stick some pictures of
people from magazines
on the board. Call out a
description, and have Ss
touch the appropriate
picture while repeating
the sentence. Next, point
to pictures and form
sentences. Point out that
do or does is added to the
start of questions and the
end of answers.
-
Ask Ss to do this
exercise individually first
then compare their
answers with a partner.
-
Check Ss’ answers.
-
Ask Ss to match the
pictures to the people.
Discuss the answers, and
ask Ss to recall parts of
the recording that help
them to do the matching.
- T whole
class
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
Have for descriptions
6.
Look at the cover page of 4Teen
magazine and make the sentences.
Key:
1.
Does the girl have short hair?
- No, she doesn’t.
2.
Does Harry Potter have big
eyes?
3.
The dog has a long tail.
4.
- And you, do you have a round
face?
- Yes, I do / No, I don’t.
7.
Phuc, Duong and Mai are talking
about their best friends. Listen and
match.
Key:
Phuc: c Duong: a Mai: b
10’
10’
Post-
teach
- Ask Ss to fill in the gaps
by recalling the recording
and using the information
in the grammar input box.
Play the recording to
allow Ss to check their
answers.
- Pair-work
* Production:
8.
What are the missing words?
Write is or has. Listen again and
check your answers
1.
has
2. Is 3. Has 4. Is
5. Has 6 is
10’
*Homework:
-
Prepare next lesson
Date of planning:29/9/2017 Date of teaching:6A,C: 2/10/2017
6D:5/10 /2017
PERIOD 19:UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2
School year: 2017-2018
35
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use the present continuous to talk about future plans
and arrangements.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My friends”.
2.
Structures:
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
The Present continuous for future.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-
teach
-
Organizing
-
Have ss play alphabet
games
-
T calls each letter of the
alphabet
-
Ask Ss to try to recall a
verb beginning with each
letter
-Whole
class
* Warm-up:
Alphabet game
Eg: A- act, ask
B- buy, bring ....
5’
While-
teach
-
Play the recording and
ask Ss to listen and follow
the conversation on the
page. Play the recoding
again and ask Ss to circle
all the verbs.
-
Use grammar box to
describe actions happening
now, and some describe
plans for the future. Point
out contextual clues, such
as use of adverbs of time.
-
Ask Ss to fill in the table
with sentences from the
conversation.
- Individual
work
* Presentation:
Grammar
The Present continuous for future.
1. Listen again to part of the
conversation.
10’
While-
teach
- Ask them to feedback
with reasons for their
choices.
- Pair-work
2. Now, underline the present
continuous in the conversation.
Write them in the table.
Actions now Plans for future
They’re coming Example: This
over.
evening, we are
working on our
school project.
10’
School year: 2017-2018
36
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to complete the
sentences individually.
Remind them to pay
attention to the “be” verb
and to the spelling of verbs
ending. Discuss any
difficulties before Ss
attempt 4.
-
Ask Ss to write N for
actions happening now, and
F for future plans.
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
* Practice:
3.
Write sentences about Mai’s plans
for next week . use the present
continuous for future.
Example: She’s finishing her
homework. (finish)
Key:
1.
is talking 2. isn’t going
3. is visiting 4. is having
4. Sort them out! Write N for Now
and F for future.
Key:
1. N 2. F 3. N 4. F 5. F 6. N
10'
Post-
teach
-
Have Ss prepare for
activity by first writing the
days Monday to Sunday,
and writing activities next
to each they should add
the three activities listed in
5: organizing a party,
working on a project, going
swimming. They should
leave some days free to
arrange new plans.
-
Practice the model
conversation with the class.
Then ask Ss to mingle and
make arrangements with
their classmates. Afterward
feedback by asking Ss to
tell the class about their
plans.
- Whole
class
* Production:
5. Game: Would you like to come to
my party?
Choose the day of the week that you
plan to :
-
Have a party.
-
Prepare for the class project.
-
Go swimming.
Example:
Nhung’s week
Mon Tue
Wed Thu
Fri Sat
Sun
*Homework:
-
Practice more by using the present continuous for future.
-
Prepare next lesson
Date of planning:30/10/2017 Date of teaching:6C: 4/10/2017
6A,D:7/10 /2017
PERIOD 20:UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 4: Communication
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can read for specific and general information in texts.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My friends”.
School year: 2017-2018
37
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
2.
Structures:
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
The Present continuous for future.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-
teach
- Have Ss look at extra
vocabulary.
- Whole class
* Presentation:
Extra vocabulary:
+Choir(n):n nhạc hợp
xướng
+Firework competition(n)
+Greyhound racing(n): đua
chó săn
+Field trip(n):chuyến đi thực
tế
+Temple(n)
+Volunteer(n)
+Independent(a): độc lập
+Curious(a):
+Freedom-loving
+Responsible(a) trách nhiệm
+Reliable (a) đáng tin cậy
5’
While-
teach
-
Show the picture of the five
friends in the magazine.
Discuss the friends with class:
where they are come from,
what their name might be, what
they might like to do, etc.
-
Can bring a map or a global to
show where they are from.
-
Tell the class they will be
introduced to some new verbs.
-
Ask Ss to the star signs of the
five friends in 4Teen magazine.
-
Ask Ss to look at the
adjectives of personalities in the
star sign and compare them with
what they read about the
five friends in 1.
-
Have Ss review the star sign
description for their own signs.
Ask Ss to tick adjectives they
agree with.
-
Allow them to share their
thoughts with a partner.
- Pair-work
-
Whole class
-
Individual
work
-
Pair -work
* Practice:
1.
Read the passage form
4Teen magazine.
2.
Find the star sign of each
friend to find out about their
personality. Do you think the
description is correct?
3.
Look at the star sign. Do
you agree with the
description?
10’
10’
10’
Post-
teach
- Have Ss play a line-up game.
- Whole class
* Production:
4. Think about your friends’
10’
School year: 2017-2018
38
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
- Ask Ss to arrange themselves
in order of birthdays. Support
them by reviewing months and
dates and giving a question and
answer they can use: When’s
your birthday?
personalities. What star
signs do you think they are?
Find out if you are correct!
Play a line-up game
*Homework:
-
Write a paragraph to describe your friend in your notebook.
- Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning:7/10/2017 Date of teaching:6A: 9/10/2017
6D,:10/10 /2017
PERIOD 21:UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 5: Skills 1
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use read for specific and general information in texts
including advertisements and emails.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My friends”.
2.
Structures:
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
School year: 2017-2018
39
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
The Present continuous for future.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-
teach
-
Show the class three
objects/pictures of objects that
you might use at camp, e.g.
torch, backpack, hiking shoes.
-
Ask the class to guess when
you might use all three
objects. Then have Ss open
their books and check their
guesses.
-
Discuss with Ss the features
of advertisements: title, short-
texts, eyes-catching, contact
- Whole class
- Answer
* Presentation:
Prediction
What objects you might use at
camp.
5’
While-
teach
-
Tell Ss this advertisement is
about the Superb Summer
Camp. Ask Ss to look at it for
2 minutes and try to remember
as much as they can. Then ask
the class to cover the page and
tell T what they remember.
-
Ask Ss to read and find the
answers to the questions. Ss
can underline parts of the
email that help them with the
answers. Set a strict time limit
to ensure Ss read quickly for
information. Accept any
reasonable answers.
-
Set a longer time limit for Ss
to read the text and answer T
or F. Encourage Ss to support
their answers.
-
Ask Ss to make their own
English camp schedule then
ask them to report their results
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
* Practice:
Reading
1. Read the advertisement for the
Superb Summer Camp and
choose the best answer.
-
The camp is for children of
what age?
-
What did you see in the
pictures?
-
Where will the camp be?
-
What can you do at the camp?
-
When does it happen?
Key:
1. b 2. c 3. a
2.
Read the text quickly. Then
answer the questions.
Key:
1.
an e-mail
2.
A stay at the Superb Summer
Camp.
3.
Yes, he is.
3.
Read the text again and write
True or False.
Key:
1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F
6. F 7. F
10’
10’
School year: 2017-2018
40
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
o
*Homework:
-
Write a schedule for yourself.
-
Prepare the next lesson:
(Skills 2)
Date of planning:8/10/2017 Date of teaching:6A: 11/10/2017
6E:10/10 /2017
6D:12/10/2017
PERIOD 22:UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 6: SkillS 2
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can listen for specific ideas and write an entry for a
magazine using notes.
II.
Language Focus:
School year: 2017-2018
41
to class.
- Individual
work
Speaking
4. Make your own English camp
schedule.
10’
Morning
Afterno
n
Day 1
Day 2
Day 3
Post-
teach
-
Go back to the advertisement
and elaborate the activities
listed with Ss. Brainstorm
ideas onto the board. Ask Ss to
use the ideas they
brainstormed to fill in their
own schedule.
-
Give each Ss a fixed amount
of time to speak. Ss can report
to the class about their
partner schedule.
- Pair -work
* Production:
5. Take turn. Tell your partner
about it. Listen and fill in the
schedule.
10’
Morning
Afternoo
n
Day 1
Day 2
Day 3
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My friends”.
2.
Structures:
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
The Present continuous for future.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’
Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-
teach
-
Ask Ss to see the
photos first. Then point
at the words in the box
and ask them to do the
matching.
-
Play recording for
checking and practicing
reading the words.
- Individual
work
* Presentation:
Listening
1. What do you see in the photos? Choose
the words in the box to fill the table. Then
listen and check.
Key:
5’
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to refer to the
contents of the
advertisement. Give Ss
time to decide which
activities are like more
likely to happen at the
camp and which are not.
Ask them to explain
why they think so.
-
Have Ss brainstorm the
things that Mr. Lee
plans for camp.
- Play the recording.
Ask Ss to listen the first
time. Then play the
recording again and
follow Ss to fill in the
table as they listen. Ss
can share their answer
before playing recoding
-
Individual
work
- Whole
class
-
Pair-work
* Practice:
2. Which activities do you think may/ may
not happen at the Superb Summer Camp.
Key:
-
Activities that may happen at the Superb
Summer Camp: a, b, d, e, f, g, i.
-
Activities that may not happen: c, h
(because the camp is in Ba Vi Mountains)
3. Listen to Mr Lee, the camp leader,
talking on the phone with Phuc’s parents.
What are they doing on Day Two and Day
Three at the camp?
Morning
Afternoon
Day two
Day three
10’
10’
School year: 2017-2018
42
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
a final time to allow
pairs to check their
answers.
- Tell the class three
letters can help them to
write better. Introduce
the rubric: Write a
magazine entry. Write
about your friends. Then
write about your plans.
Writing
Study skills
Research, draft, check.
10’
Post-
teach
- Encourage Ss not to
refer back to the unit.
Instead they can use
what they have learnt
during the unit to help
them answer the
questions. That will help
Ss see how for they
progressed, and which
areas need further
practice.
- Individual
work
* Production:
4. Write for 4Teen magazine about your
plans this weekend with your friends.
-
Introduce yourself.
-
Describe your friends.
-
Describe your plans.
10’
*Homework:
-
Write your plans in your notebook.
-
Prepare the next lesson
School year: 2017-2018
43
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:8/10/2017 Date of teaching:6A,D: 14/10/2017
6E:12/10/2017
PERIOD 23:UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 7: Looking Back
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can review all what they have learnt in this unit.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My friends”.
2.
Structures:
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
The Present Continuous for future.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’ Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-
teach
-
Ask Ss to write the correct
words on the faces.
-
Have Ss check their answers
with a partner.
-
Explain that Haiku is a
traditional form of Japanese
poetry. Ask Ss to work in
groups of three to exchange
their poems.
- Individual
work
-
Group-work
*
Presentation:
Vocabulary
1.
Write the correct words in the
faces
Creative boringfunny
Confident hard-working
kind clever talkative sporty
shy patient serious
2.
Make your own Haiku.
Write a three line Haiku poem to
describe yourself.
5’s
10’s
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to choose a member
of group and write a short
description of him/her.
Demonstrate the activity with
the class, with Ss choral
reading Group & A’s roles.
-
Elicit the language being
practiced in this activity. Ask
Ss to complete the
conversations individually. As
in !, Ss can share answers
with a partner, but they should
record their original answers
to guide their self-assessment.
-
Group-work
- Individual
work
*
Practice:
Grammar
3.
Game: Who’s who?
Example:
A: He’s tall. He has glasses. He’s
creative too. He isn’t shy.
B: Is it Minh?
A: Yes! / No, try again.
4.
Complete the dialogue.
Key:
A: are doing
B: meeting are going
A: am playing
B: am watching
10’s
10’s
School year: 2017-2018
44
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Post-
teach
-
Divide Ss into pairs of As
and Bs. Allow Ss to complete
the communication activity.
Ask Pairs to join other pairs
forming groups of 4.
-
As and Bs can share what
they leant about their
partners’ schedules before
discussing with the class.
- Pair-work
* Production:
Communication
5. Student A looks at the schedule
on this page. Student B looks at the
schedule on the next page.
Example:
A: What are you doing tomorrow?
B: I’m playing football with my
friends.
or
I’m not doing anything.
10’s
*Homework:
- Prepare next lesson
School year: 2017-2018
45
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:8/10/2017 Date of teaching:6A:16/10/2017
6D17:/10 /2017
6E:14/10/2017
PERIOD 24:
REVIEW 1
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can revise the language they have studied and the skills
they have practiced since Unit 1.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: revise the vocabulary they have learnt since Unit 1.
2.
Structures:
The present simple and the present continuous tense.
There is / There isn’t - There are / There aren’t.
Prepositions of place.
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
The Present Continuous for future.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’
Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-
teach
-
Ecilit the rules of
pronouncing the final s/-es
if needed.
-
Ask Ss to do the exercise
individually.
-
Organize this as a game.
Ask Ss to do this in pairs.
The pairs that find the most
words will go to the board
and write the answers.
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
* Presentation:
Pronunciation
1.
Odd one out. Which underlined
part is pronounced differently in
each line?
Key:
1. D 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. B
2.
Write the name of the school
things and furniture in the house
which begin with /b/ and /p/.
Key:
/b/
/p/
Book, bag, Pen, pencil,
bed…
picture,
poster
5’
While-
teach
-
Have Ss do this exercise
individually and then share
their answers with a partner.
-
Check Ss’ answers.
-
Ask Ss to do in pairs. This
can be done as a small
competition.
- Individual
work
- Whole
class
Vocabulary
3.
Complete the words.
Key:
1.
English 2. homework 3.Lunch
4.Sports 5. badminton 6. Physics
7. lesson 8. Judo
4.
Do the crossword puzzle.
Across:
1.
wardrobe 3. Living room
5. apartment 6. Poster
Down:
2. Dining room 4. hall
10
School year: 2017-2018
46
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
While-
teach
-
Quickly check Ss’ answers.
If time allows, ask Ss to
think of some other words
and make sentences.
-
Elicit the use of the present
and the present continuous.
Call one st do this exercise
on the board. Other Ss also
do this.
-
Check Ss’ answers.
-
Ask them for explanation.
-
Ask Ss to read the text
carefully and pay attention to
the hints. Ask Ss to do this
individually and compare
their answers with a partner.
-
Check Ss’ answer and ask
them to explain the negative
forms in their answers.
-
At the same time, ask one
pair to go to the board and
does this exercise.
-
Check Ss’ answers.
-
Ask Ss to do this in pair.
After checking their
answers, ask one or two
pairs to act out the
conversation.
-
Ask Ss to do this exercise
individually and check their
answers with a partner
before giving their answers
to the T to confirm the
correct answers.
-
Have Ss work in groups.
One interviews the other two
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
5.
Choose the correct words.
Key:
1.
quite 2. Shy 3. Hard-working
4. patient 5. Sporty
* Practice:
Grammar
6.
Complete the sentences with the
present simple or the present
continuous form of this verbs in
brackets.
Key:
1.
is raining
2.
do you have
3.
am not going out ; am doing
4.
likes; is sleeping
5.
is
7.
Complete the description with
the correct form of the verbs “be”
or have”.
Key:
1.
is 2. isn’t 3. doesn’t have
4. is 5. has 6. are 7. is 8. Is
8.
Read the sentences and draw
the furniture in the right place.
Everyday English
9.
Number the lines of the
dialogue in the correct order.
Key:
6 1 7 2 3 5 8 4
Reading
1. Choose A, B or C for each
blank in the e-mail.
Key:
1. A 2. C 3. C 4. B 5. A 6.
B
2. Read the text and answer the
questions.
Key:
1. It’s in a quiet place not for from
the city center.
10
10
School year: 2017-2018
47
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
what they like and dislike
about the school and the
reason why.
-
Summaries Ss’ ideas.
-
Play the recording once for
Ss to listen. Play the
recording again for Ss to
check their answers.
Announce the answer to Ss.
-
Ask Ss to quickly read the
questions. Ask Ss to listen to
the recording again and
answer the questions.
-
Ask Ss to compare their
answers before giving T
their answers.
- Group-
work
-
Individual
work.
-
Individual
work
2.
They are hard-working and
serious.
3.
They are helpful and friendly.
4.
There are five clubs.
5.
Because it’s a good school.
Speaking
3.
Interview two classmates. Ask
them what they like and dislike
about your school and the reasons
why.
Listening
4.
An and Mi are talking on the
phone. Listen and circle the parts
of the house you hear.
Key:
Kitchen
garden
living room
bedroom
5.
Listen again and answer the
questions.
Key:
1.
She’s watering the plants n the
garden.
2.
He’s listening to the radio.
3.
He’s in Mi’s bedroom.
4.
She’s watching TV.
Post-
teach
-
Elicit the parts of an e-
mail.
-
Ask Ss to work in groups
to do this exercise.
-
- Group-
work
* Production:
Writing
6. Write an e-mail to your friend.
Tell him/ her about a family
member.
10
*Homework:
-
Write the e-mail in your notebook.
-
Prepare for test 1.
School year: 2017-2018
48
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:13/10/2017 Date of teaching:6A: 18/10/2017
6D: 19/10 /2017
6E:17/10/2017
Period 25: Written test 1
Aims: - Evaluating the students’ understanding about the learned vocabulary and structures
Objectives: - Students will be able to understand the requirement of the test and to do the test
correctly using the learned language items.
Materials: Copies of the written test needed for the whole class.
Time allowed: 45 minutes
Procedure:
MA TRẬN
CH ĐỀ
Nhn biết
Thông hiu
Vn dng
Tng
TN
TL
TN
TL
TN
TL
I. Listening
8
8
2.0
2.0
II. Language Focus
4
8
4
6
22
1.0
2.0
1.0
1.5
5.5
III. Reading
4
2
6
1.0
0.5
1.5
IV. Writing
4
4
1.0
1.0
Tng
8
8
8
4
6
6
40
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
10.0
20%
20%
20%
10%
15%
15%
100%
School year: 2017-2018
49
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
*TEST (For class 6)
I.
Listen to the text then fill one suitable word in the blank .(2 pts)
Hi, My name’s Susie Brewer. I’m (1)…………….…. years old. I’m now in grade (2)
………………at PLC Sydney. I (3)………….. it here, as I like to (4) ……………….in a
girls school. The (5)…………….. at my school are nice and very helpful, and my (6)
………………teacher is Mrs Susan McKeith. She teaches us maths. I have 3 hours to study (7)
………………..in the afternoon. Usually I do my homework at breaktime. We
(8)……………….our uniform everyday, but today we aren’t, as we’re going to have an outing
to Taronga Zoo.
II.
Odd one out: (1pt)
9 - A. pens
B. books
C. maps
D. students
10- A. open
B. home
C. come
D. goes
11- A.book
B. pen
C. pencil
D. toy
12- A. sofa
B. bathroom
C. table
D. TV
III.
Choose the best answer: (2pts)
13- Listen! Someone …………………at the door.
A. is knocking B. knocking C. knock D. knocks
14- I usually ……………. my homework with my friends.
A. play B. do C. am playing D. am doing
15-
Hoang …………… in a small house in the village.
A. is living B. live C. are living D. lives
16-
………… is there in your room ? There is a bed, a desk and a chair.
A. What B. Who C. Which D. How
17-
What is your favorite ……………….? Maths.
A. subject B. food C. drink D. toy
18-
There ………… many beautiful flowers in this garden.
A. is B. are C. do D. does
19- We ………………..English now.
A. are studying B. is studying C. study D. studies
20- ……… you get up at 6 o’clock everyday?
A. Are B. Am C. Do D. Does
IV.
Put the verbs in the correct form: (1pt)
21- The children (listen)…... …………… to music at the moment.
22- Hoa (play)……………. badminton every afternoon.
23- Please be quiet! My father (sleep)…..
……………..
24- I usually(visit)….………. my grandpa and grandma.
V.
Fill : in / on / between: (1.5pts)
25- There is a pen ………………. the pencilcase.
26- The pictures are ……………... the wall.
27- There is a bed ……………….. the window and the wardrobe.
28- There are many books …………. the bookshelf.
29-
There is a sink and a shower …………….the bathroom.
30-
The red book is ……………….. the green book and the yellow book.
VI.
Read the text then do as requested (1.5pts)
a/ Choose the best answers to fill in the e-mail: (1pt)
Hi Tom,
How (31)…………. you? Now I want to tell you about my bedroom.
School year: 2017-2018
50
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
My room is small. But it is very beautiful. There (32)……….... a bed, a wardrobe, a table, a
chair and a lamp. I like music, so I put three posters of famous singers (33)………. the wall. I
usually (34)……….. my homework on the desk in front of the big window. My bedroom is my
favourite room in the house.
What does your favourite room, Tom?
Write to me soon.
Best wishes,
Vy
31-
a. are
b. is
c. am
d. do
32-
a. are
b. is
c. do
d. does
33-
a. in
b. on
c. at
d. behind
34-
a. does b. am doing c. do d. are doing
b/ Answer the questions: (0.5pt)
35-
Is Vy’s bedroom big or small?
………………………………………………………………………..
36- Where does Vy usually do her homework?
………………………………………………………………………………….
VII.
Complete each sentence so it means the same as the sentences above.(1pt)
37-
I don’t have a bookshelf in my bedroom.
There ...............................................................................................
38-
We have a sink, a fridge, a cooker and a cupboard in our kitchen.
There ...............................................................................................
39-
The notebook is under the book.
The book ..........................................................................................
40-
The dog is in front of the microwave.
The microwave ................................................................................
- THE END -
10 Track 10.mp3
School year: 2017-2018
51
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:14/10/2017 Date of teaching:6A,D: 21/10/2017
6E:19/10/2017
Period 26:UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Lesson 1: Getting Started
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can know the key language and structures to be learnt in
this unit.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My neighborhood”.
2.
Structures: Comparative adjectives.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’
Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-teach
Write the Unit title on the
board “Lost in the old
town!”. Explain the meaning
of “surprise”.
-
Ask Ss to guess what the
picture might show or what
the conversation might be
about.
-
Ask Ss questions about the
picture.
- Whole
class
* Presentation:
Guess what the picture might
show or what the conversation
might be about.
Ex:
-
Where are Nick, Khang and
Phong?
-
What might be happening to
them? What are they doing?
5’
While-teach
-
Play the recording (twice)
-
Ask Ss to read the
conversation and check their
answers. Confirm the correct
answers.
-
Ask Ss to read and put the
action in order.
-
Tell Ss to refer back to the
conversation to find the
phrases. Practice saying
them together.
-
First, model the role-play
with a more able St. Then
- Listen
and read
-
Individual
work
- Pair-
* Practice:
1.
Listen and read
a.
Read and put the action in
order.
Key:
2 5 3 4 1 6
b.
Making suggestions.
Key:
1.
a. Where shall we go first?
b.
Let’s go to “Chua Cau”.
2.
a. Shall we go there first?
b.
Ok, sure.
3.
a. Shall we go by bicycle?
b.
No, let’s walk there.
2. Work in pairs. Role-play
making suggestions.
10’
School year: 2017-2018
52
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
ask pairs to role-play the
short conversations before
demonstrating for the class.
-
Have Ss quickly match
each place (in the picture)
with its name. Then play it
again , pausing after each
item and asking them to
repeat chorally and
individually. Correct their
pronunciation.
-
First, model this activity
with a more able St. Ask Ss
to work in pairs . Call some
pairs to practice in front of
the class.
-
Have Ss quickly match
instruction with the diagram.
Check their answers. If Ss do
not understand the sentences,
use the diagrams to work the
meaning out from the
context.
work
-
Pair-
work
-
Pair-
work
-
Individual
work
3.
Match the places below with
the pictures. Then listen,
check and repeat the words.
Key:
1. E 2. H 3. F 4. C 5. G
6. A 7. B 8. D
4.
Think about where you live.
Work in pairs. Ask and
answer questions about it.
Example:
A: Is there a theatre in your
neighborhood?
B: Yes, there is. / No, there
isn’t.
5.
Match the instructions in
the box with the pictures.
Key:
1.
Go straight on.
2.
Turn left at the traffic lights.
3.
Go past the bus stop.
4.
Take the first turning on the
left.
5.
Go to the end of the road.
6.
Go along the street.
7.
Cross the street.
10’
10’
Post-teach
- Ask Ss to give their partner
the directions to one of the
places on the map, and they
try to guess. Then swap.
- Pair-
work
* Production:
6. Game
Example:
A: Go straight. Take the
second turning on the left. It’s
on your right.
B: Is that the art gallery? A:
Yes, it is./ No, try again.
10’
*Homework:
-
Practice giving directions to your house.
-
Prepare the next lesson
School year: 2017-2018
53
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:15/10/2017 Date of teaching:6A: 23/10/2017
6D: 24/10 /2017
6E:21/10/2017
Period 27:UNIT 4: MY NEIGHTBOURHOOD
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can pronounce correctly the sounds /i:/ and /i/ in isolation
and in context; use vocabulary related to the topic “My neighborhood.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the vocabulary related to the topic “My neighborhood”.
2.
Structures:
Comparative adjectives.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, flash cards.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’
Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-teach
- Practice saying the adjectives
with Ss. Use some examples to
work the meaning out of the
context. With difficult adjectives
T may translate them or ask Ss to
translate. Then ask Ss to write the
correct adjectives in the blanks.
Play the recording as many times
as required to allow Ss to check
their answers and support their
pronunciation.
- Whole
class
* Presentation:
Vocabulary
1. Fill in each blank with one
word from the box. Listen,
check and repeat the words.
5’
While-
teach
-
Explain that some words go
together, but some don’t.
-
Write the adjectives on the
board and allow Ss to attach
vocabulary cards to make
matches.
-
Ask Ss to complete the word
webs in their books.
-
Play the recording.
-
Ask Ss to listen and repeat the
words.
-
Individual
work
- Pair-
* Practice:
2. Now match the adjective s
from the box in 1 with their
opposites below.
Key:
-
boring exciting
-
historic modern
-
noisy quiet/ peaceful
-
convenient inconvenient
-
fantastic terrible
3. Work in pairs. Ask and
answer questions about your
10’
School year: 2017-2018
54
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
0’
0
*Homework:
-
Learn vocabulary by heart.
-
Prepare the next lesson
School year: 2017-2018
55
work
neighborhood. Use the words
-
Have Ss practice reading the in 1 and 2 to help you.
words first. Example:
-
Play the recording for Ss to A: Is our neighborhood
listen and do the task. - Whole polluted?
-
Ask Ss to listen while T play the
class
B: No, it isn’t.
recording.
A: Is it peaceful?
-
Ask Ss to chant along. Provide - Group- B: Yes, it is.
further practice by dividing the
work
Pronunciation /i:/ and /i/
1
class into 2 groups. Have groups
4. Listen and repeat the words.
sing alternate lines. Pay attention the sound /i:/ and
-
Stick some pictures of people /i/
from magazines on the board. - T whole
Key:
Call out a description, and have
class
/i:/
/i/
Ss touch the appropriate picture
Cheap, sleep,
Historic,
while repeating the sentence.
peaceful,
exciting,
Next, point to pictures and form
convenient,
expensive,
sentences. Point out that do or
police.
noisy, friendly.
does is added to the start of -
questions and the end of answers.
Individual
5. Listen to the sentences and
1
-
Ask Ss to do this exercise
work
circle the words you hear.
individually first then compare
Key:
their answers with a partner.
1. Living
-
Check Ss’ answers.
2. Heat
3.
Seats
4.
Sheep
5.
Tins
6.
Mill
7.
Teams
8.
Chip
- Ask Ss to listen while T plays - Group-
the recording. Play the recording work
Post-teach
again and ask Ss to chant along.
Provide further practice by
dividing the class into two
groups. Have groups sing
alternate lines.
* Production:
10’
6. Listen and practice the
chant. Notice the sounds /i:/
and /i/.
MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
(page 40)
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:20/10/2017 Date of teaching:6A: 25/10/2017
6D: 26/10 /2017
6E:24/10/2017
Period 28:UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use adjectives to compare things.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My neighbourhood”.
2.
Structures:
Comparative adjectives.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’
Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-
teach
-
Choose 2 Ss of very
different height and ask them
to stand up. Ask the class a
question.
-
Focus Ss’ attention on
comparative forms by giving
examples.
-
Explain that comparative
adjectives are constructed in
several different ways in
English and that some of
those ways are presented in
the box. Explain the simplest
ways to identify the number
of syllables in an English
word and give further
example or practice if
necessary.
- Whole
class
* Presentation:
Grammar
Comparative Adjectives
- Who is taller?
- Example:
This ruler/ desk is long. But that
ruler/ desk is longer.
5’
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to read the
instructions. Tell Ss what
they should do.
-
Have Ss compare their
answers in pairs before
checking with the whole
class.
-
Use Ss use the example to
show what Ss should do. Ask
them to pay attention to the
syllables in each adjective
and look back at the
- Pair -
work
Individual
work
* Practice:
1. Complete the following sentences
with the comparative form of the
adjectives in brackets.
Key:
2. taller 3. Bigger
4. noisier 5. cheaper
2. Now complete the following
sentences with the comparative form
of the adjectives in brackets.
Key:
2. more beautiful
10’
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
grammar box if necessary. 3. more convenient
4.
more interesting
5.
more expensive.
-
Ask Ss to read and 10’
complete the sentences
Individual
3. Read and complete Vy’s letter to
individually. Remind them to
work
her friend.
pay attention to the number Key:
of the syllables in each 1. Drier 2. Smaller 3. Older
adjectives.
4. Wider 5. more delicious
6. Older 6. Cheaper
-
Elicit the contrast between
the things in the two 4. Look at the pictures of Yen Binh
neighborhoods and the
Individual
neighbourhood and Long son
adjectives that can be used to
work
neighbourhood. Now write about the
describe them.
differences.
10’
-
Correct.
-
Tell Ss how to form a 5. Complete the following sentences
question and pay attention to with the comparative form of the
the number of the syllables adjectives in brackets.
in each adjectives. Key:
-
Check their answers. 2. More expensive
-
Model with a St. Ask Ss to 3. More comfortable
work in pairs. Call some 4. More historic
pairs to practice in front of 5. Narrower
the class. 6. Work in pair. Ask and answer
questions.
- Ask Ss to think ot the
places they’ve been to. - Pair
Model with a more able Ss
and then have them work in
pairs while T goes around
Post-
the class and monitors.
teach
- Ask a few pairs with the
most imaginative ideas to
report them to the class.
* Production:
-work
7. Work in pairs. Ask and answer
questions about the places that you
know. Use the comparative form of
the adjectives in the box.
Example:
A: Is Hue busier than Da Nang?
B: No, it isn’t.
*Homework:
-
Write 3 sentences using
comparative adjectives.
-
Prepare the next lesson
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:21/10/2017 Date of teaching:6A: 26/10/2017
6D: 25/10 /2017
6E:26/10/2017
PERIOD 29 : CHECK THE TEST1
I.
Aims: - Helping students to recognize the mistakes made in the written test.
II.
Objectives:
-
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to recognize the mistakes in their test.
III.
Materials: Test papers which have been marked.
IV.
Procedure:
T’s activities
Ss’ activities
Content
I) Warm up:
-
Greeting.
-
Get the class to sing a song.
II) New lesson:
-
Give general comments.
-
Give the test papers back to ss
-
Give comments in details.
-
-
-
Praise the excellent students and
encourage the not- good- yet
ones.
-
Sing a song
to warm up the
class.
-
Listen.
-
Receive the
test papers
-
Pay attention
-
Listen
I.CHECK THE TEST1
I. 2.0 points ( 0.5 each)
1- eleven 2- six
3-like
4-study
5-teachers 6-favorite/favourit
7-vietnamese 8-wear
II.
Odd one out: (1pt)
( 0.25 each)
9- D , 10- B
,
11- D
,
12- B
III.
Choose the best answer: (2pts)
( 0.25 each)
13- A, 14- B , 15- D , 16-A
17-A , 18-B , 19-A , 20-C
IV.
Put the verbs in the correct form:
(1pt)
( 0.25 each)
21- are listening 22- plays
23-is sleeping 24-visit
V. Write : in / on / between: (1.5pts)
( 0.25 each)
25. in 26. On 27. between
28.on 29.in
30.between
VI. Read the text then do as requested
(1.5pts)
a/ Choose the best answers to fill in
the e-mail: (1pt)
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
III) Consolidation:
-
Commment in conclusions.
IV.Homework:
-
Prepare the next lesson :
- Listen to the
conclusions to
make sure to
do well next
time.
( 0.25 each)
31-a 32-b 33-b
34-c
b/ Answer the questions: (0.5pt)
( 0.25 each)
35.
It’s small. (Vy’s bedroom is small).
36.
She usually does her homework on the
desk in front of the big window.
VII.
Complete each sentence so it
means the same as the sentences
above.(1pt)
(0.5 each)
37.
There isn’t a bookshelf in my
bedroom.
38.
There is a sink,a fridge,a cooker ,and
a cupboard in our kitchen.
39.The book is on the notebook.
40.The microware is behind the dog .
IV.Homework:
- Prepare the next lesson
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:28 /10/2017 Date of teaching:6A: 26/11/2017
6D: 25/11 /2017
6E:31/10/2017
Period 30 :UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Lesson 4: Communication
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can talk about different places and show directions to
these in a neighborhood.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My friends”.
2.
Structures:
Comparative adjectives.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-
teach
-
Have Ss look at extra
vocabulary.
-
Ask Ss if they know about
Hoi An. Allow 20 30
seconds for Ss to think.
-
Have Ss brainstorm about
Hoi AN.
- Whole class
* Presentation:
Extra vocabulary:
o First
o
Then
o
After that
o
Finally
-
What do you know about Hoi
An?
-
Anything you can remember
about it.
5’
While-
teach
-
Playing the recording. Ask
Ss to listen only. Then play
the recording again and allow
Ss to fill in the gaps as they
listen.
-
Ask Ss to share their
answers in pairs, before
playing the recording a final
time to allow the pairs to
check their answers.
-
Ask Ss to read the audio
guide again, paying attention
to the use of the connective
works.
-
Whole class
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
* Practice:
1. Nick is listening to an audio
guide to Hoi An. Listen and fill in
the gaps.
Key:
1.
Historic
2.
Convenient
3.
Straight
4.
Second
5.
Left
6.
Right
7.
Second
8.
Next to
2. Choose one of the cities below.
15’
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
-
Ask Ss to read the brief
information about London
and Ho Chi Minh city and
look carefully at the two
simplified maps of the two
cities.
-
Remind Ss of the
expressions they can use to
give directions; have Ss refer
to the expressions in the
dialogue and 5 of getting
started.
-
Haves Ss prepare their audio
guide individually and then
share it with a partner.
- Have Ss practice presenting
their audio guide in pairs.
- Pair-work
Create an audio guide for your
city.
Remember to:
-
include some comparisons with
other cities.
-
give directions to different
places.
15’
Post-
teach
-
Call some Ss to present their
audio guide to the whole
class.
-
After each St has finished
his/ her audio guide, ask for
some comments from the
other Ss.
-
Make comments and any
mistakes if there are any.
- Whole class
* Production:
3. Present your guide to your
class.
*Homework:
-
Write your audio guide in your
notebook.
-
Prepare the next lesson
10’
6A,D:Bù CT tiết 29,30
Date of planning:27/10/2017 Date of teaching:6A: 30/10/2017
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Period 31 :UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
6D: 31/10 /2017
6E:02/11/2017
Lesson 5: Skills 1
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use read for specific and general information about
good things and bad things in a neighborhood.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My neighborhood”.
2.
Structures:
Comparative adjectives.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-
teach
- Ask Ss to look at the picture
of Khang’s neighborhood. And
ask them some questions.
- Whole class
* Presentation:
Questions:
1.
Where do you think Khang’s
neighborhood is?
2.
What do you think about it?
3.
Do you like living there?
Why? Why not?
5’
While-
teach
- Ask Ss to scan the passage to
find where the words suburbs,
backyard are in the passage.
-
Ask Ss to note where they
found the information that help
them to answer the questions.
-
Have ss compare their
answers in pairs.
-
Ask Ss to scan the passage
again and find the information
to complete the table.
-
Ask Ss to note where they
found the information that help
-
Individual
work
-
Pair - work
-
Individual
work
* Practice:
Reading
1.
Find these words in Khang’s
blog. What do they mean?
2.
Read Khang’s blog. Then
answer the questions.
Key:
1.
It is in the suburbs of Da
Nang City.
2.
Because it has beautiful
parks and sandy beaches and
fine weather.
3.
They are very friendly.
4.
Because there’re many
modern buildings and offices
in the city.
3. Read Khang’s blog again
and fill in the table with the
information.
Key:
Like:
10’
10’
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
them to answer the questions.
-
Have ss compare their
answers in pairs.
-
Remind Ss of expressions
they can use to give directions.
-
Model this activity with a
more able St and then have Ss
work in pairs.
-
Call some pairs to talk before
the whole class, then invite
some comments from other Ss.
-
Pair work
-
Pair work
-
It’s great for outdoor
activities.
-
There’s almost everything
here
-
The food is very good.
-
People are incredibly
friendly.
Dislike:
-
the street are busy, crowded,
and noisy during the day.
Speaking
4. In pairs, ask and answer
questions about how to get to
the places on the map.
Example:
(page 44)
10’
Post-
teach
-
Note some common errors
and discuss them with the
whole class.
-
select some pairs to act out
their dialogue in front of the
class.
-
give feedback
-
Give comments on strengths
and correct a few errors in the
target language.
- Pair -work
* Production:
5. Work in pairs. Ask and
answer the question about the
way to get to the places in your
town, village/ near your
school.
10’
*Homework:
-
Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning:28/10/2017 Date of teaching:6A: 01/11/2017
6D: 02/11 /2017
6E:04/11/2017
Period 32:UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Lesson 6: Skills 2
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can listen to get the information about directions to some
places in a neighbourhood and write about what they like or dislike about their neighbourhood.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My neighborhood”.
2.
Structures:
Comparative adjectives.
Modal verb: must
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-
teach
-
Ask Ss to read Study Skills
Listening carefully. Then apply
these tips to doing Listening
exercises.
-
Play the recording and ask Ss
to write down the words or
phrases in the blanks.
-
Play the recording again for Ss
to check the answers.
- T whole
class
* Presentation:
Listening
Study Skills Listening
1. Listen to the conversation
between a strager and Duy’s
Dad. Fill in the blanks with the
words you hear.
Key:
1.
The end
2.
Right
3.
Lower secondary school
4.
Le Duan street
5’
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to read the rubric and
study the map carefully. Ask
them to work in pairs to discuss
how to get to the places
numbered 1 4.
-
Play the recording and have Ss
choose the correct answers as
they listen.
-
Call on some Ss to write their
answers to the board.
-
Play the recording again for Ss
to check their answers. Pause at
the sentences that include the
information Ss need for their
answers.
-Ask Ss to tick what they like
and don’t like about their
- Pair-work
* Practice:
2. Listen the conversation
again. Choose the correct
places from the list below.
Write the correct letters A-F on
the map.
Key:
1.
A
2.
C
3.
F
4. D
Writing
3. Tick (
) what you like or
don’t like about a
neighbourhood.
Sandy beaches
Heavy traffic
10’
10’
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
neighbourhood. Ask them to
count how many things they
have in common with their
partners.
-
Ask Ss to make notes on what
they like and dislike about their
neighbourhood.
-
Ask them to share their notes
with their partners.
-
Read out the notes from some
more able Ss to the whole class.
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
-Pair-work
Many modern buildings and
offices
Peaceful street
Good restaurants and cafes
Sunny weather
Busy and crowded streets
Many shops, and markets
4. Make notes about your
neighbourhood. Think about
the things you like/ dislike
about it.
LIKE
DISLIKE
10’
Post-
teach
-
Ask Ss to refer back to the
reading for useful language and
ideas, and write some useful
expressions and language on the
board.
-
Ask them to write the first
draft. Then have them write their
final version.
- Individual
work
* Production:
5. Write a paragraph about
your neighbourhood saying
what you like or dislike about
living there. Use the
information in 4, and Khang’s
blog as a model.
10
*Homework:
-
Write your paragraph in your book.
-
Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning:29/10/2017 Date of teaching:6A,D: 04/11/2017
6E:07/11/2017
Period 33:UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Lesson 7: Looking Back
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can review all what they have learnt in this unit.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My neighborhood”.
2.
Structures:
Comparative adjectives.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’
Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-
teach
-
Ask Ss to write the
words in their notebook
individually and then
check with their partners.
Correct the mistakes. Let
Ss repeat the words.
Check their
pronunciation.
-
Ask Ss to read the
sentences carefully and
complete them with the
adjectives they have
learnt in Unit 4.
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
-
Individual
work
* Presentation:
Vocabulary
1.
Write the correct word for each
picture.
Key:
1.
statue
2. Railway station
3. park 4. temple
5. memorial 6. cathedral
2.
Fill in each gap with a suitable
adjective.
Key:
1.
noisy
2. narrow
3. historic 4. inconvenient 5.
cheaper/ more expensive
5’
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to work
individually to put the
following adjectives in
the correct column.
-
Check and confirm the
correct answers.
Individual
work
* Practice:
Grammar
3. Put the following adjectives in
the correct column.
Key:
One syllable
Fast, hot, large
Two syllables
Happy, noisy, quite, heavy
Three or more syllables
Exciting, expensive,
convenient, difficult,
polluted
10’
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
- Ask Ss to match the
name of a nature wonder
in column A with a word
in column B.
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
4.
Match the name of a nature
wonder in column A with a word
in column B.
Key:
10’
While-
- Ask Ss to check their
answers with a partner
before discussing their
answers as a class.
Faster
More convenient
Noisier
More difficult
Heavier
More expensive
Happier
Hotter
More polluted
More exciting
Larger
Quieter
teach
Post-
teach
-
Ask Ss to complete the
sentences comparing the
pictures. Use comparative
form of the adjectives
given.
-
Ask Ss to read the
questions and answers
twice. Then match them.
-
Have them write all
sentences in their
notebooks.
-
Ask Ss to role-play the
questions and answers
-
Pair-work
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
5.
Complete the sentences
comparing the pictures. Use
comparative form of the adjectives
below.
Key:
1.
Noisier than
2.
More modern than
3.
More convenient than
4.
More beautiful than
5.
More expensive than
*
Production:
Communication
6.
Match the questions with the
correct answers.
Key:
a c d e f g h b
7.
Role-play the questions and
answers.
10
10
*Homework:
-
Do project”.
-
Prepare next lesson
Date of planning:3/11/2017 Date of teaching:6A: 06/11/2017
6D: 07/11 /2017
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Period 34: RIVISION
UNIT 3+UNIT4
6E: 0 /11/2017
I.
The aims:
Review is to revise the language Ss have studied and the skills they have practiced since Unit3.
II.
Language Focus:
-Vocabulary:
The lexical items related to the topic “My friends” and the topic “My neighborhood”.
- Structures:
+Verbs be and have for descriptions.
+The Present continuous for future.
+Comparative adjectives.
III.
Teaching ads: Lesson plan, chalk , ….
V. Procedures:
T’activities
Ss’activities
content
I.
RIVISION:Unit 3:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical
items related to the topic “My
friends”.
2.
Structures:
+Verb have and be for
descriptions.
+The Present continuous for
future.
Listen and
copy
Listen and
copy
I.ĐỘNG TỪ “HAVE”: (have/ has)
(+) I/ You/ We/ They/DTsố nhiều + have+ N.
He/ She /It/ DT số ít + has+ N.
(-)I/ You/ We/ They/ DTs nh + don’t have+ N.
He/ She/ It/ DT số ít + doesn’t have+ N.
(?) Do+I/ you/ we/ they/ DT số n + have+ N?
Does + he/ she/ it/ danh từ số ít + have+ N?
Yes, S+ do/does.
No, S + don’t/doesn’t.
EX1: I have a new pen.
I don’t have a new pen.
Do you have a new pen?
Yes, I do..
EX2: She has a new pen.
She doesn’t have a new pen.
Does she have a new pen?
Yes, she does.
LƯU Ý:
-Khi tả về khuôn mặt, tóc, mũi….ta dùng
have/ has
-Khi tả tính ch, chiều cao……..ta dùng:
To be ( am/ is/ are)
EX:
He is tall. He is friendly.
He has a round face. He has short hair.
II.THÌ HIỆN TẠI TIẾP DIỄN: (diễn tả 1 kế
hoạch trong tương lai)
S + am/is/are + V-ing
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
……….
II.
RIVISION:Unit 4:
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical
items related to the topic “My
neighborhood”.
2.
Structures:
Comparative adjectives.
-
Ex
-
Do exercises
-
L
-Thường dùng kèm với: tonight/ this evening (tối
nay)/ tomorrow (ngày mai)
EX: I’m not coming tonight. I’m busy.
This evening, they are watching a film.
Tomorrow, I’m playing football with my team.
III.COMPARATIVE ADJECTIVES:
(Tính từ so nh)
a.Đối với tính từ ngn: (Short adj)
nhng tính từ khi phát âm chỉ 1 âm tiết:
short →shorter, tall →taller, big bigger….
S1 + be + tính t ngn + “er” + than + S2
: I am taller than she is (hoặc her).
My father is bigger than your father.
b.Đối với nh từ dài:(Long adj)
nhng tính từ khi phát âm từ 2 âm tiết trở
n: careful more careful, beautiful more
beautiful…
S1 + be + MORE + tính t dài + than + S2
Ex: My mother is more beautiful than her mother.
This book is more exciting than that book.
ưu ý:
a.
Khi tính từ 2 âm tiết tận cùng :
Y, OW, ET, ER thì được xem tín h từ
ngắn
Ex:
happy happier
Narrow narrower
Quiet quieter
Clever cleverer
Gentle gentler the gentlest
b.
Nếu tính từ tận cùng là “Y”, trước 1
phụ âm thì đổi Y”→ I rồi thêm ER
Ex:
lovely lovelier
c.
Nếu tính từ ngn tận cùng E, ta chỉ thêm R
Ex:
nice nicer
d.
Nếu tính từ ngn tận cùng 1 phụ âm, trước
1 nguyên âm thì ta gấp đôi phụ âm cuối
rồi thêm ER (ngoại trừ tính từ tận cùng là: W).
Ex:
thin thinner
Fat fatter
hưng : Slow slower
e.
Các tính từ tận cùng : -ed, -ful, -ing, -ish, -
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
-Do exercises :
4. Homework.
-Do exercises in workbook
ous….. nhng nh t dài.
Ex:
more bored, more useful, more boring, more
selfish, more continuous………..
NGOẠI L Ệ:
a.
Good / well better
b.
Bad / badly worse
c.
Much / many more
d.
Little
less
e. Far farther / further
Ex1:Fill each blank with a suitable word from
the box.
untidy are not near next on his bag
An's bedroom is big but messy. There ...(1)...
clothes on the floor. There is a big desk ...(2)... the
window, there are dirty bowls and chopsticks
...(3)... it. He usually puts his school ...(4)... under
the desk. His bed is ...(5)... to the desk, and it is
also ...(6).... There is a cap, some CDs and some
books on the bed. An's Mum is ...(7)... happy with
this, and how An is tidying up ...(8)... room.
Date of planning:4/11/2017 Date of teaching: 6A: 08/11/2017
6D: 09/11 /2017
6E:09/11/2017
Period 35: UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Lesson 1: Getting Started
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can know the key language and structures to be learnt in
this unit.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “things in nature” and “travel item”.
2.
Structures:
Superlatives if short adjectives.
Modal verb: must
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, picture.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Tim
e
Pre-
teach
-
Show some pictures of
nature wonders.
-
Ask Ss questions about the
picture.
-
Ask Ss to share any recent
experiences of going on a
picnic.
- Whole class
* Presentation:
Describe the pictures.
Ex:
-
What can you see in this
picture?
-
Where is it?
-
Do you know this place?
5’
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to work
individually. Allow them to
share answers before
discussing in groups or as a
class.
-
Tell Ss to refer back to the
conversation to find the
phrases. Ask Ss to write the
sentences. Ensure they add
appropriate punctuation.
-
Practice saying the phrase
together.
-
Use the example to
practice a conversation with
Ss. Then ask Ss to develop a
role-play around their ideas.
Support with suggestions.
More able Ss can try to
extend the conversation.
- Individual
work
- Group-work
- Pair-work
* Practice:
1. Listen and read
*/ New words.
-
desert | dɪˈzɜːt |
-
waterfall | ˈwɔːtəfɔːl |
-
valley | ˈli |
-
island | ˈaɪlənd |
a.
Answer the following
questions.
Key:
1.
Vy is
2.
She went to wrong room.
3.
Uluru
4.
Australia.
5.
An island.
b.
Put the words in the correct
order.
Key:
1.
Can you spell that, please?
2.
Can you repeat that, please?
3.
Can I come in?
c. Brainstorm situations when
people use these sentences.
Then role-play the situations
with a partner.
Example:
10’
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
-
Ask pairs to perform for
the class.
-
Play the recording. Ask Ss
to listen and repeat the
words.
-
Ask Ss to label the pictures
with the correct words. Ss
can work in pairs.
-
Show picture cards of the
vocabulary. Elicit Ss’
answers. Then provide the
correct words.
-
Individual
work
-
Pair -work
A: Hi, Can I order a cheese
and meat pizza, please?
B: Sure. What’s your name,
please?
A: It’s Nick.
B: Can you spell that, please?
A: Yes, it’s N-I-C-K.
2.
Listen and repeat the
following words.

1.
mountain
2. River
3. waterfall 4. Forest
5. cave 6. Desert
7. lake 8. Beach
9. island 10. valley
3.
Now label the pictures.
Key:
1.
mountain
2. river
3. waterfall 4. forest
5. cave 6. desert
7. lake 8. beach
9. island 10. valley
10’
10’
Post-
teach
- Ask Ss to look back the
conversation in Getting
Started and try to find the
vocabulary used.
- Group-work
* Production:
4. Read the conversation in 1
again. Tick the words you can
find.
10’
*Homework:
-
Learn Vocabulary.
-
Practice the conversation.
-
Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning:4/11/2017 Date of teaching: 6A,D,E: 11/11/2017
Period 36: UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1
I.
Objectives:
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
By the end of this lesson, students can pronounce correctly the sounds /t/ and /st/ in isolation
and in context; use vocabulary related to travel item”.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “things in nature” and “travel item”.
2.
Structures:
Superlatives if short adjectives.
Modal verb: must
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, flash cards.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Ti
me
Pre-
teach
-
Ask Ss to match the words
they know.
-
Practice saying the
vocabulary with Ss. Ask Ss to
touch the correct pictures as
they say the word.
Alternatively, create a mime
for each word with Ss.
- Individual
work
- Whole class
* Presentation:
I.Vocabulary:Travel items
1.
Match the words with the
pictures then practice saying the
following items.
Key:
1.
painkillers
2. Scissors
3. plaster 4. Sun cream
5.
sleeping bag
6.
Walking boots.
7.
Backpack
8.
compass.
5’
While-
teach
-
Read and act out the
sentences.
-
Elicit ideas for sentence 1.
Then allow Ss to complete the
remaining sentences.
-
Check their ideas at the end.
-
Remind Ss that in the
introduction they thought
about useful things for beach,
desert, and mountain. Tell Ss
they are going to a beach
holiday and they need to order
the items form very useful to
not very useful.
-
allow Ss to work in pairs to
form their list.
-
Ask pairs to join other
groups and compare their lists.
Encourage more able Ss to
give reasons for their choices.
-
Play the recording.
-
Ask Ss to listen and number
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
-
Individual
work
* Practice:
2.
Complete the following
sentences.
Key:
1.
Compass
2. Sun cream
3. Painkillers 4. Backpack
5. Plaster.
3. Now put the items in orders.
Number 1 is most useful on
holiday. Number 8 is the least
useful.
II.Pronunciation: Sounds:
/t/ and /st/
4. Listen and number the words
10’
10’
10’
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
the words in the order they
hear them.
-
Allow Ss to compare their
answers.
-
Play the recording the
second time. Discuss the
answers as a class.
-
Play the recording again.
Pause after each word and ask
Ss to repeat.
- Whole class
you hear.
Best boat coast lost boot
desert plaster forest
5. Listen again and repeat the
words.
Post-
teach
-
Play the recording of the
sentences. Ask Ss to listen
carefully and raise their hands
when they hear the /t/ or /st/
sounds.
-
Alternatively, divide the
class into a /t/ group and a /st/
group and they listen and
respond to their own sound.
-
Play the recording again.
Pause after each sentence and
ask Ss to repeat.
- Group-work
* Production:
6. Listen and repeat. Pay
attention to the bold-typed parts
of the words.
10’
*Homework:
-
Learn vocabulary by heart.
-
Prepare the next lesson.
Date of planning:4/11/2017 Date of teaching: 6A: 13/11/2017
6D,E: 14/11 /2017
Period 37:UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2
I.
Objectives:
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
By the end of this lesson, students can use comparative and superlative adjectives to describe
things in nature.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “things in nature” and “travel item”.
2.
Structures:
Superlatives of short adjectives.
Modal verb: must
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Pre-
teach
While-
teach
Teacher’s Activities
-
Show some pictures about some
places in the world.
-
Choose more able Ss to act as Vy,
and read the sentences to the class.
-
Ask Ss to stick T or F in the box
provided.
-
Play the recording and allow Ss to
check their answers.
Ss’ Activities
-Whole
class
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
Content
*
Warm-up
:
Where is it?
(Ss’ answer)
*
Presentation:
I.
Grammar
*.Comparative and
superlative adjectives
1.
Vy is giving a quiz
about wonders of the
world. Read the sentences
and guess if they are true
or false.
Key:
1. T 2. T 3. F
4. T 5. T 6. T
Ti
me
5’
10’
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to look back at Vy’s
sentences, find and underline all the
examples of est.
-
Ask Ss to complete the table
individually. Dis cuss their answers
at the end
-
Ask Ss to complete the passage
with the correct words. Pairs can
practice role-playing the completed
passage.
-
Prepare the slips of paper
beforehand for the groups.
Alternatively dictate the names of
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
- Group work
II.Practice:
3.
Underline all the words
ending in -est in the quiz.
(Watch out)
4.
Complete the table with
the comparatives and
superlatives.
5.
Now Vy is taking about
other amazing places.
Complete the passage.
Key:
1. hottest 2. hotter
3. coldest 4. coldest
5. colder 6. biggest
7. highest 8. smaller
6. Cut up some pieces of
paper. Write the names of
some famous places on
10’
10’
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
the places and allow Ss to write
them on blank slips.
- Ask Ss to read Vy’s note and find
the uses of must”. Refer Ss back
to the grammar table if necessary.
Discuss the uses of “must”.
- Individual
work
them. Work in group and
make sentences about the
places.
7. Vy is giving Mai some
feedback. Read and
underline the forms of
must.
Post-
teach
- Ask Ss to complete the sentences.
Ss can share their ideas in pairs.
Discuss answers as a class. As an
extension, Ss can act out the
sentences, one acting as a teacher,
one acting as a student.
- Pair - work
III. Production:
8.
Look at the classroom
rules below. Write some
more rules for you and
your classmate.
Example:
1.
We must arrive on
time.
2.
We mustn’t pick
flowers in the school
garden.
10’
*Homework:
-
Practice more by using the comparatives and superlatives.
-
Prepare next lesson
Date of planning:4/11/2017 Date of teaching: 6A: 15/11/2017
6D,E: 16/11 /2017
Period 38:UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Lesson 4: Communication
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use must and mustn’t to give orders and talk about
and give travel advices.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “things in nature” and “travel item”.
2.
Structures:
Superlatives if short adjectives.
Modal verb: must
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Time
Pre-teach
* Presentation:
- Have Ss look at extra
vocabulary.
- Whole class
*Extra vocabulary:
+Tent(n):
+Torch(n):
+Sun hat(n):
+Waterproof coat(n):
+Map(n):
+Mobile phone(n):
5’
While-
teach
* Practice:
-
Show the picture of Mount
Everest.
-
Ask Ss to look at the picture
of Mount Everest and show
picture of extra vocabulary.
Ask Ss to decide whether the
objects are useful for going to
Mount Everest, e.g. Must we
take a torch to Mount
Everest?
-
Ask Ss to read quickly and
check their ideas.
-
Ask Ss to read the text again
and ask some follow-up
questions.
-
Ask Ss to use information in
the text and their own ideas to
fill the must and mustn’t
columns.
-
Create your own list and
demonstrate the activity with
a more able St.
-
Swap roles. Then ask the
class to complete the role-
play.
-
Whole class
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
1. Read the travel guide
entry.
-
Must we take a torch to
Mount Everest?
-
What is a mountain
range?
-
What do you think
diverse mean?
-
Have you had any
unforgettable
experiences?
2.
Now make a list of the
things you must take to
the Himalayas. Then add
things you mustn’t take.
3.
Role-play being a tour
guide and a tourist. Tell
your partner what to
prepare for their trip to
Himalayas. Try to give
reasons.
10’
10’
10’
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Post-teach
- Ask the class to complete
the role-play. Ask pairs to
demonstrate for the class.
- Whole class
* Production:
4. Perform your role-play
for the class.
10’
*Homework:
-
Write 4 sentences with must and mustn’t.
-
Prepare the next lesson.
Date of planning:4/11/2017 Date of teaching: 6A: 22/11/2017
6D,E:21/11/2017
Period 39:UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Lesson 5: Skills 1
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use read a brochure for tourist information and talk
about and give travel advice.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “things in nature” and “travel item”.
2.
Structures:
Superlatives if short adjectives.
Modal verb: must
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Time
Pre-
teach
* Presentation:
- Ask Ss to compare the text
in Communication and Skill
1. Encourage them to think of
the purposes of the texts and
where they might see them.
- Whole class
Introduction
(Ss’ answers)
5’
While-
teach
* Practice:
-
Ask Ss to read the text
quickly to answer the
questions and check their
ideas from the introduction.
-
Discuss the Study Skill with
Ss.
-
Ask Ss to find the four
words in the passage and
underline them, then check
their meaning.
-
Ask Ss to read the sentences
then write True or False.
Refer them back to the text
for the answers.
-
Ask Ss to read the passage
again and answer the
questions.
-
Discuss with Ss which
things they find interesting
about Ha Long Bay and Hue.
Brainstorm ideas on the
board.
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
- Pair work
I.Reading
1. Before you read, look
at the pictures below and
make predictions about
the text. Then read and
check your ideas.
-
Where is the passage
from?
-
What is it about?
-
What do you know
about the subjects?
2.
Find these words in
the passage in 1, then
check their meaning.
3.
Read the following
sentences. Then tick true
or false.
Key:
1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F
5. T
4. Make your own
English camp schedule.
Key:
1.
Ha Long Bay is in
Quang Ninh Province.
2.
You must take a boat
ride.
3.
A visit to the Imperial
City more important.
10’
10’
10’
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
- Ask Ss to close the books.
Ask Ss to tell their partner
about the place.
- Group -work
4. Because people travel
there just for the food.
II.Speaking
5.
Make notes about one
of the places in the
brochure. Use the
information in the text
and your own ideas.
6.
Tell your partner
about the place.
Ha Long Bay and Hue
Post-
teach
Show a picture of your town.
Tell the class they are visiting
it. Review interesting features
of your town with Ss. Then
ask Ss to suggest some
advice.
- Pair -work
* Production:
7. Your friends are
visiting your town. Think
about what they must
and mustn’t do while
they are here. Role-play
the conversation in
groups.
Things they must
do/bring:
Things they mustn’t
do/bring:
*Homework:
-
Prepare the next lesson.
Date of planning:4/11/2017 Date of teaching: 6A:25/11/2017
6D,E: 23/11 /2017
Period 40:UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Lesson 6: Skills 2
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can listen to get the information about travel plans and
write a travel guide entry about an interesting place.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “things in nature” and “travel item”.
2.
Structures:
Superlatives if short adjectives.
Modal verb: must
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player
IV.
Procedures:
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Time
Pre-
teach
-
Ask Ss to recall the 2 places in
the brochure in skill 1. Ask Ss
which one they think Nick’s
family will choose as their holiday
destination. Ask Ss to explain
their choices.
-
Play the recording for the
answer.
- Whole class
* Presentation:
I.
Listening
1.
Nick’s family are in the
travel agent’s. they want
to go on vacation. They
are choosing a place from
the brochure above.
Which place do they
choose?
5’
While-
teach
-
Read through the questions with
Ss and support with any
difficulties before they attempt to
answer. Play the recording again.
-
Correct.
-
Choose Ss to show their places
to the class. Ask some questions
to prepare the class for the
activity.
- Individual
work
Individual
work
* Practice:
2. Listen again and
answer the following
questions.
Key:
5.
Ha Long Bay, Hue,
Mui Ne or Nha Trang.
6.
Can we see a picture of
the hotel in Mui Ne?
7.
Mui Ne is cheaper but I
think Ha Long Bay is
more interesting.
8.
Yes, he is.
II. Writing
3. Write a travel guide
about a place you know.
Questions:
-
What nature wonders
are there?
-
What things can do
there?
-
What thngs we must do?
15’
15’
Post-
teach
-
Ask Ss to make notes about their
chosen places.
-
Ask Ss to use the Travel Guide
in Communication as their model.
-
Correct.
- Individual
work
* Production:
4. In notes, fill each blank
in the network with the
information about the
place. Then use these
notes to write a short
paragraph about it.
-
Research.
-
Draft
-
Check
10’
*Homework:
-
Write a travel guide in your notebook.
-
Prepare the next lesson
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:4/11/2017 Date of teaching: 6A,D,E: 27/11/2017
6D,E: 25/11/2017
Period 41:UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Lesson 7: Looking Back
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can review all what they have learnt in this unit.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “things in nature” and “travel item”.
2.
Structures:
Superlatives if short adjectives.
Modal verb: must
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Time
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Pre-
teach
-
Ask Ss to label things nature
they can see in the picture.
-
Ask Ss to work individually
and write the words about
travel items.
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
* Presentation:
I.Vocabulary: things in
nature
1.
Label the things nature
you can see in this picture.
Key:
1.
mountain
2.
Waterfall
3. forest 4. Cave
5. desert 6. Lake
7. beach 8. Island
9. valley
Travel items
2. Write the words
1.
4.
2. 5.
3. 6.
5’
While-
teach
Ask Ss to work individually to
complete the sentences
- Individual
work
* Practice:
II. Grammar
3.
Fill the gaps in the
following sentences.
Key:
1.
hottest 2. longest
3. highest 4. largest
5. best
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to work in pairs and
match the name of a natural
wonder in column A with a
word/ phrase in column B.
Monitor the activity and offer
help to Ss when necessary.
-
Ask Ss to practice the
conversation in pair. Draw Ss’
attention to the questions and
answers for the information
about Mount Everest and Loch
Lomond. Then ask them to
discuss all the natural wonders
in 4.
-
Ask them to provide any
related information they know
about these natural wonders.
- Pair-work
4.
Match the name of a
nature wonder in column A
with a word in column B.
Key:
1-d
2-c
3-a
4-e
5-b
5.
Work in pairs and
practice the conversation
below. Discuss all the
nature wonders in 4 and
any related information
you know.
10’
10’
Post-
* Production:
10’
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
teach
- Divide Ss into group A and
B. Allow them to complete
their part of the dialogue. Then
Ss act out the dialogue.
Choose pairs to demonstrate
for the class. T can encourage
them to include mimes and
actions.
- Pair-work
III. Communication
6. Complete the dialogue.
Key:
1.
Must
2.
Must
3.
Must
4.
Must
*Homework:
-
Do “project” on page 56.
-
Prepare next lesson
Date of planning:24/11/2017 Date of teaching: 6A: 27/11/2017
6D,E: 28/11/2017
Period: 42 REVIEW 2
I/ Objectives
( Unit 4 ,5)
By the end of the lesson, the students can:
Use the lexical items related to unit 4, 5.
Practise using the comparative and superlative of the adj.
II/ Language contents
Lexical items related to unit 4, 5.
The comparative and superlative of the adj.
III/ Teaching aids
Prepare pictures, CD disk, cassette
IV. Anticipated problems
*
Ss may have difficulty in completing all exercises.
*
Solution: T makes models, explains, gives eliciting questions.
V.Procedures:
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Teacher’ activities
Students activities
I.Vocabulary:
1.Find in the box the opposites of the
words(Ex2/page 68)
Give Ss enough time to do the task individually.
Then tell them they will play the game 'Race to
the board'.
Copy the adjective lists to the board (one copy
for each team). Ask for 20 volunteers for 2
teams, each team of 10 students. The two teams
stand in 2 lines facing towards the board and
when they hear a signal sound from you they
will take turns to write the opposite on the board
as quickly as they can. The fastest team which
has the most correct answers wins.
II.Grammar:
1.Rewrite the sentences,using the
comparative or superlative of the adjectives
in 2 above.(Ex5/p 68)
Do as required
play the game 'Race to the board'.
Key: 1. small 2. noisy 3. cheap 4.
low 5. sad 6. hot
7. unimportant 8. short
9. clean 10. boring
Ss do the task individually first then share the
work with the partners.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Do the first sentence with Ss as a model. Ask
them to identify the adjective (cold). Ask them
to give the opposite, then elicit the new sentence
beginning with the subject "Viet Nam" Tell
them to do similarly with the rest, and they can
find t n the word lists in 2.
.
2.
Complete the sentences with the Present
simple or the Present continuous form of
the verbs.
1. They often (visit) ………..their parents in
the holidays.
2. We (speak) ……..French at the moment.
3. I (watch) ……..TV about 3 hours a day.
4. My family usually (go) ………..to the
movies on Sunday.
5. Look at the girl! She (ride)…..a horse.
6. We (play) ………..tennis now.
7. Minh sometimes (practice) ………..the
guitar in his room.
8. …..you (like) …..chocolate ice cream?
9. I really (like) ………..cooking.
10. Hung can’t answer the phone because he
(take)……….. a shower.
11. -..........They (be) your sisters?
- Yes, they(be)................
12. On my way home I often(meet) ….many
children who (go) …to school.
13. Mary (not work) ………today
because it's Sunday.
14. My father and I (visit) …….Ha Long
Bay this summer vacation.
15. Let’s (help)…………….. mom,
LAn. She (clean)……… the floor.
Volunteers write the sentences on the board
Key:
1.
Viet Nam is much hotter than Sweden.
2.
The Andes is the Iongest range in the
world.
3.
A car is often more expensive than a
motorbike.
4.
Ho Chi Minh City is noisier than Hoi An.
5.
The air in the city is often more polluted
than the air in the countryside.
6.
Ba Be Lake is the biggest natural lake in
Viet Nam.
Homework:
+Do exercises on workbook
+Revision for test 2
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:25/11/2017 Date of teaching: 6A: 29/11/2017
6D,E: 30/11/2017
Period 43: Written test 2
Aims: - Evaluating the students’ understanding about the learned vocabulary and structures
Objectives: - Students will be able to understand the requirement of the test and to do the test
correctly using the learned language items.
Materials: Copies of the written test needed for the whole class.
Time allowed: 45 minutes
Procedure:
*TEST (For class 6)
6A:29 /11/2017 6D,E: 30 /11/2017
Part A. Listening (2.5ms)
I.
Listen and number the words you hear from 2 to 6. Number 1 is an example. (1.25ps)
Words
desert
best
coast
boat
lost
boot
Number
1
II.
Listen to the following conversation and fill the missing words (1.25ps)
A: Excuse me. Where is the supermarket ?
B: Go to the end of this street. It’s on your (1)…………..…..
A: And where is the lower secondary school ?
B: It’s in Le Duan Street. Take the second (2)……………..….. and it’s on your left.
A. Great! Where can I have(3)…………. coffee ?
B: “Quynh” Café in Tran Quang Dieu Street is a good one.
A: How can I get there ?
B: First (4)…….….. left, then turn right. Go Straight. It’s on your left.
A: How about art gallery ?
B: First take the third left. Then (5)……… to the end of Le Loi Street, and it’s on your right.
Part B. Language focus (3 Ps)
I.
Choose the best answer.( 1.5p)
1.
There is a park in front ………. the hotel.
A.
of
B. on C. to D. at
2.
Hoi An is so ………. .
A.
boring
B. historic C. terrible D. modern
3.
The town has many motorbikes. It’s very ……. .
A.
quiet
B. happy C. exciting D. noisy
4.
My head hurts. I need to take some ……. .
A.
backpacks
B. compasses C. painkillers D. plasters
5.
Excuse me ! ………. there a post office near here ?
A.
Is
B. Are C. Do D. Does
6.
Ayres Rock is in …….. .
A.
Viet Nam B. Australia C. Brazil D. Great Britain
II.
Give the correct form of the following verbs: ( 0.5p)
1.
You must ( get )………………… up early .
2.
Look ! Our teacher (come)…… …………………..
III.
Fill the blanks with the appropriate forms of the adjectives in brackets(1p)
1.
Travelling by taxi is ……….…………….than by bus. (expensive)
2.
The Sahara is the ……………desert in the world. (hot)
3.
This building is …………………… than that one. (tall)
4.
She’s not very happy. Her exam results are ………..than her sister. (good)
Part C. Reading: (2,5 ms)
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
I.
Complete the letter using the words in the box. (1,5 marks)
air staying backyard are cleaner
noisy
Dear Nick,
I'm sorry I couldn't write to you earlier because I was very busy. Now, we're (1) .............in a
small hotel near a shopping area. Near my hotel, there's a cinema, and a supermarket. There
(2).................. some big shops at the end of the street. It's also very (3)................... here because
there's always a lot of traffic, day and night. In my hometown I live in a quieter street. There
are some small shops, a school, a post office but there isn't a cinema. The streets are narrower
but they are (4).................... and there isn't so much traffic. The (5) .......................... is much
fresher, too. And every house has a (6) .......................... and a front yard.
II.
Read the E-mail and answer the following questions.( 1p)
Dear Phong!
I’m sorry I couldn’t write to you earlier because I was very busy. Now, we’re staying in a small
hotel near a shopping area in District 10. Near my hotel, there’s a cinema, a bank, a supermarket
and some cas. There are some big shops at the end of the street. It is also very noisy
here because there’s always a lot of traffic, day and night.
In my hometown, I live in a quieter street. There are some small shops, a school and a market
in my neighbourhood but there isn’t a park and a cinema. The streets are narrower but they are
cleaner and there isn’t so much traffic. The air is much fresher, too. And every house has a
backyard and a front yard.
Love,
Minh
1.
Where is Minh staying now?
2.
Why is it very noisy around his hotel?
3.What are there in his neighbourhood?
4.Is there a cinema in his neighbourhood?
Part D. Writing (2ms)
I.
Reorder the words to make the meaningful sentences.( 1p )
1.
modern / This / is / that / more / hotel / than / one.
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
2.
on / Take / turning / the / left / the / second.
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
3.
a / square / there / near / house / Is / your ?
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
4.
do / at / must / You/ homework / home / your.
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
II.
Rewrite these sentences so that it has the same meaning as the root ones. (1P)
1.
Viet Nam doesn’t have any deserts.
-> There…......................................................................
2.
No one in my class is more beautiful than Hanh.
-> Hanh...............................................................
3.
The hospital is on the left of the museum.
-> The museum is ..........................................................
4.
My house is smaller than Lan’s house.
-> Lan’s house is ...........................................................
TOT DONG SECONDARY SCHOOL TEST 2(45 minutes)
Full name:.............................................. Subject: English 6. Period :43
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Class: 6A .………, November…… 2017
Part A. Listening (2.5ms)
I.
Listen and number the words you hear from 2 to 6. Number 1 is an example. (1.25ps)
Words
desert
best
coast
boat
lost
boot
Number
1
II.
Listen to the following conversation and fill the missing words (1.25ps)
A: Excuse me. Where is the supermarket ?
B: Go to the end of this street. It’s on your (1)…………..…..
A: And where is the lower secondary school ?
B: It’s in Le Duan Street. Take the second (2)……………..….. and it’s on your left.
A. Great! Where can I have(3)…………. coffee ?
B: “Quynh” Café in Tran Quang Dieu Street is a good one.
A: How can I get there ?
B: First (4)…….….. left, then turn right. Go Straight. It’s on your left.
A: How about art gallery ?
B: First take the third left. Then (5)……… to the end of Le Loi Street, and it’s on your right.
Part B. Language focus (3 Ps)
I.
Choose the best answer.( 1.5p)
1.
There is a park in front ………. the hotel.
A.
of
B. on C. to D. at
2.
Hoi An is so ………. .
A.
boring
B. historic C. terrible D. modern
3.
The town has many motorbikes. It’s very ……. .
A.
quiet
B. happy C. exciting D. noisy
4.
My head hurts. I need to take some ……. .
A.
backpacks
B. compasses C. painkillers D. plasters
5.
Excuse me ! ………. there a post office near here ?
A.
Is
B. Are C. Do D. Does
6.
Ayres Rock is in …….. .
A.
Viet Nam B. Australia C. Brazil D. Great Britain
II.
Give the correct form of the following verbs: ( 0.5p)
1.
You must ( get )………………… up early .
2.
Look ! Our teacher (come)…… …………………..
III.
Fill the blanks with the appropriate forms of the adjectives in brackets(1p)
1.
Travelling by taxi is ……….…………….than by bus. (expensive)
2.
The Sahara is the ……………desert in the world. (hot)
3.
This building is …………………… than that one. (tall)
4.
She’s not very happy. Her exam results are ………..than her sister. (good)
Part C. Reading: (2,5 ms)
I.
Complete the letter using the words in the box. (1,5 marks)
air staying backyard are cleaner
noisy
Dear Nick,
Mark
Teacher’s remark
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
I'm sorry I couldn't write to you earlier because I was very busy. Now, we're (1) .............in a
small hotel near a shopping area. Near my hotel, there's a cinema, and a supermarket. There
(2).................. some big shops at the end of the street. It's also very (3)................... here because
there's always a lot of traffic, day and night. In my hometown I live in a quieter street. There
are some small shops, a school, a post office but there isn't a cinema. The streets are narrower
but they are (4).................... and there isn't so much traffic. The (5) .......................... is much
fresher, too. And every house has a (6) .......................... and a front yard.
II.
Read the E-mail and answer the following questions.( 1p)
Dear Phong!
I’m sorry I couldn’t write to you earlier because I was very busy. Now, we’re staying in a small
hotel near a shopping area in District 10. Near my hotel, there’s a cinema, a bank, a supermarket
and some cas. There are some big shops at the end of the street. It is also very
noisy here because there’s always a lot of traffic, day and night.
In my hometown, I live in a quieter street. There are some small shops, a school and a market
in my neighbourhood but there isn’t a park and a cinema. The streets are narrower but they are
cleaner and there isn’t so much traffic. The air is much fresher, too. And every house has a
backyard and a front yard.
Love,
Minh
1.
Where is Minh staying now?
…………………………..……………………………………………………...
2.Why is it very noisy around his hotel?
……………………………………………………………………………………….
3.What are there in his neighbourhood?
……………………………………...................………………………………………..
4.Is there a cinema in his neighbourhood?
……………………………………………...........…………………..…………………………
Part D. Writing (2ms)
I.
Reorder the words to make the meaningful sentences.( 1p )
1.
modern / This / is / that / more / hotel / than / one.
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
2.
on / Take / turning / the / left / the / second.
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
3.
a / square / there / near / house / Is / your ?
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
4.
do / at / must / You/ homework / home / your.
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
II.
Rewrite these sentences so that it has the same meaning as the root ones. (1P)
1.
Viet Nam doesn’t have any deserts.
-> There…......................................................................
2.
No one in my class is more beautiful than Hanh.
-> Hanh...............................................................
3.
The hospital is on the left of the museum.
-> The museum is ..........................................................
4.
My house is smaller than Lan’s house.
-> Lan’s house is ...........................................................
Date of planning:26/11/2017 Date of teaching: 6A,D,E: 2/12/2017
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Period 44: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
x
Lesson 1: Getting Started
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can know the key language and structures to be learnt in
this unit.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “Tet”: things, activities and practices.
2.
Structures:
Will to express intentions.
Should/ shouldn’t for advice.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, picture.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’
Activities
Content
Time
Pre-
teach
- Write the word TET on the
board and ask St to give any
words they know relating to
the topic. Allow Ss to give a
Vietnamese word and ask
other Ss in the class if they
know the equivalent in
- Whole
class
* Presentation:
TET HOLIDAY
5
mins
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to answer the
questions.
-
Introduce some new words
or revise the ones already
learnt to prepare Ss well for
listening such as celebrate,
decorate and fireworks. Then
play the recording.
-
Ask Ss to work individually.
Ideally ask them the questions
-
Answer
-
Listen and
read
-
Individual
work
* Practice:
1. Listen and read
Questions:
What will they talk about?
When is Tet this year?
What do you do at Tet?
2. Are those following
statements true or false
10
mins
10
mins
without referring to the
according to the conversation
listening.
in 1? Tick the correct column.
- Ask them to explain why
Key:
they think a statement is false
1. F 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. T
and they can correct it.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to do the task in
pairs. Tell Ss to refer back to
the conversation to find the
information.
-
Ask them if the information
given is true and if they can
add anything.
-
Let Ss do the matching
independently as the
vocabulary is quite simple
and some of them will be
familiar to them like School
ground, books, swimming
pool, etc.
-
Ask Ss to answer the
question by referring to the
pictures. Picture 4 might get
different answers from Ss in
the south where it’s very hot
and Ss in the north where Tet
is usually the coldest time of
the year.
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
3. Find the information in 1
and fill in the blanks.
Key:
1.
This year we will have Tet at
the end of January.
2.
We decorate our house.
3.
We buy flowers and plants.
4.
We shouldn’t burn fireworks.
5.
We eat great food and get
lucky money during Tet.
6.
Tet is a time for family
gatherings.
4.
Write the words/ phrases in
the box under the appropriate
pictures.
Key:
1.
b
5. h
2.
a
6. g
3.
c
7. f
4.
e
8. d
5. Look at the pictures again.
Which pictures do you think
are related to Tet?
Key:
About Tet: 1 2 3 7 8
10
mins
10
mins
Post-
teach
-
Ask Ss to write down three
things or activities you like
best about Tet.
-
Have them compare their
list with members of their
group. Report the result to the
class.
- Group-
work
* Production:
6. Game
Write down three things or
activities you like best about
Tet.
*Homework:
-
Learn Vocabulary.
-
Practice the conversation.
-
Prepare the next lesson
10
mins
Date of planning:1/12/2017 Date of teaching: 6A: 4/12/2017
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Period 45: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
6D,E: 5/12/2017
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can pronounce correctly the sounds /t/ and /st/ in isolation
and in context; use vocabulary related to travel item”.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “Tet”: things, activities and practices.
2.
Structures:
Will to express intentions.
Should/ shouldn’t for advice.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, flash cards.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’
Activities
Content
Time
Pre-
teach
-
Play the recording.
Ask Ss to listen
carefully and repeat the
words first, then divide
them into smaller and
smaller groups.
-
Observe and make
sure that every St is
speaking.
- Listen and
repeat
* Presentation:
I.Vocabulary
Things and activities for Tet
1.
Listen and repeat the words in
the box.
a.
Wish
g. Flower
b.
Fireworks
h. Relative
c.
Furniture
i. Pagoda
d.
Present
j. Calendar
e.
Shopping
k. Special food
f.
Free
5
mins
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to work in
groups of 3.
-
Ask Ss to look at the
pictures first and see if
they know the words.
Then ask them to do
the matching.
-
Write a verb on the
board and ask Ss to
match the verb with as
many as nouns as they
can find.
-
Check that Ss
understand the
meanings of the words
-
Group-
work
-
Whole
class
- Individual
* Practice:
2.
Work in groups. Label the
pictures with the words in 1.
Key:
1.
a
7. h
2.
i
8. e
3.
d
9. k
4. j 10. c
5. f 11. a
6. g
3. Match the verbs with the suitable
nouns.
Key:
1.
cook special food
2.
go to the pagoda
3.
give lucky money
4.
visit relative
5.
clean the furniture
6.
decorate our house
10
mins
10
mins
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
and let them match.
-
Ask them to work
independently first and
check with their
partners. Sometime
more than one answer
is possible.
-
Have Ss write the
phrases you have
formed in 3.
-
Ask Ss to practice the
sound /ʃ/ and /s/
together.
-
Play the recording
and ask Ss to listen
carefully first and
repeat. Ask them to
write the words in two
appropriate boxes.
Check if they do this
correctly.
-
Ask Ss to look at the
sentences and
underline the words
they think contain the
sounds /ʃ/ and /s/. Play
the recording and ask
them to tick to the
columns.
work
- Whole
class
-
Listen and
repeat
-
Individual
work
7.
plant trees
8.
make a wish
9.
hang a calendar
10.
watch fireworks
11.
do the shopping
12.
buy peach blossoms.
4. Write the phrases you have
formed in 3. The first one is an
example.
II. Pronunciation /ʃ/ and /s/
5.
Listen and repeat the words.
Which words have the sound /ʃ/ and
which words have the sound /s/?
Key:
6.
Listen to the sentences and tick
which has /ʃ/ and which has /s/
Key:
/ʃ/ : 2, 3, 5
/s/: 1, 4, 6, 7
10
mins
Post-
teach
-
Allow Ss to practice
reading the poem
among themselves.
-
Ask for some
volunteers to stand up
and read the poem
aloud.
- Group-
work
* Production:
7. Listen and practice reading the
short poem. Pay attention to the
sounds /ʃ/ and /s/
*Homework:
-
Learn vocabulary by heart.
-
Prepare the next lesson.
10
mins
Date of planning:2/12/2017 Date of teaching: 6A: 7/12/2017
6D,E: 8/12/2017
Period 46: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
/ʃ/
/s/
She, shopping,
should, wish,
rubbish.
Blossoms,
summer, rice,
celebrate,
school, special,
spring.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can identify and practice the language of intentions (with
will) and advice (with should).
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “Tet”: things, activities and practices.
2.
Structures:
Will to express intentions.
Should/ shouldn’t for advice.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Time
Pre-
teach
* Presentation:
- Use the pictures to practice
the target language of should
and shouldn’t in more
familiar situations. Ask Ss to
complete the four sentences.
Make sure that they combine
“should” and the verb
- Individual
work
I.
Grammar
Should and shouldn’t
1.
Look at the pictures and
complete the sentences with should
or shouldn’t.
Key:
1. Shouldn’t 2. Should
3.Shouldn’t 4.Should
5
mins
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to look at the four
signs in the studio and let
them complete the
sentences.
-
Draw their attention to the
fact that it is a TV studio
where people are working.
-
Go around and see if they
write the sentences
correctly.
-
Ask Ss to tick or cross the
activities. The phrases
illustrated by pictures make
their meanings clear.
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
* Practice:
2. At the TV studio, Phong sees
these signs. Complete the sentences
with should or shouldn’t.
Key:
1. Should 2.Shouldn’t
3.Should 4.Shouldn’t
Remember:
We use should for things that are
good to do.
We use shouldn’t for things that
bad to do.
3.
Now look at these Tet activities.
Tick the activities children should
do at Tet. Cross the activities they
shouldn’t.
Key:
4.
Use the activities in 3, write
down the sentences.
1.
We should behave well.
2.
We shouldn’t eat lots of sweets.
3.
We should plant trees.
4.
We shouldn’t break things.
10
mins
10
mins
Should
Shouldn’t
1
3
5
6
2
4
7
8
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
-
Ask Ss to write the
sentences by referring to the
activities 3.
-
Go around and check for
any spelling or grammar
mistakes.
-
Before reading. Have them
revise some words Ss have
learnt in the previous
activities like “go
shopping”, “New year
celebration” etc. Then ask
Ss to read the letter.
-
Ask ss to use the
information from the letter
and write the sentences in
two columns.
-
Go around and see if they
write the sentences
correctly.
-
Pair-work
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
5.
We should go out with friends.
6.
We shouldn’t fight.
7.
We shouldn’t play cards all
night.
Grammar
Will and won’t (will not)
1.
Read Phong’s letter to Tom.
2.
Use the information in the letter
and write full sentences in the two
columns.
Key:
1.
My father will repaint our house.
2.
I will go shopping with Mum.
3.
We will buy red envelopes.
4.
I will help my parents cook banh
chung.
5.
I’ll write again soon.
6.
We won’t buy fireworks.
7.
We won’t buy banh chung.
10
mins
Post-
teach
- Emphasize that Ss write
the TRUE sentences of what
Phong will/ won’t do at Tet.
Remind Ss of the kind of
words they have to add in
order to complete the
sentences.
- Pair - work
* Production:
3. Phong is thinking about his Tet.
Write sentences about what he will
and won’t do.
Key:
1.
Phong will visit his relatives.
2.
He will get some lucky money.
3.
He will go out.
4.
He won’t study.
Phong won’t give a present.
10
mins
*Homework:
-
Practice more the language of intentions (with will) and advice (with should).
-
Prepare next lesson
Date of planning: 8 /12/2017 Date of teaching:6A :11/12/2017
PERIOD47 : CHECK THE TEST 2
I.
Aims: - Helping students to recognize the mistakes made in the written test.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
II.
Objectives:
-
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to recognize the mistakes in their test.
III.
Materials: Test papers which have been marked.
IV.
Procedure:
T’s activities
Ss’ activities
Content
I) Warm up:
-
Greeting.
-
Get the class to sing a
song.
II) New lesson:
-
Give general
comments.
-
Give the test papers
back to ss
-
Give comments in
details.
-
Praise the excellent
students and encourage
the not- good- yet ones.
III) Consolidation:
- Commment in
conclusions.
-
Sing a song
to warm up
the class.
-
Listen.
-
Receive the
test papers
-
Pay
attention
-
Listen
-
Listen to
the
conclusions
to make sure
to do well
next time.
(Clas: 6A)
Part A. Listening (2.5ms)
I.
Listen and number the words you hear from 2
to 6. Number 1 is an example. (1.25ps)
II.
Listen to the following conversation and fill
the missing words (1.25ps)
(1)right (2)right
(3) some
(4)turn
(5) go
Part B. Language focus (3 Ps)
I.
Choose the best answer.( 1.5p)
1.-A. of ; 2.- B. historic ; 3.-D.noisy
4.-C.painkillers ; 5.-A. is ; 6.-B. Australia
II.
Give the correct form of the following verbs:
( 0.5p)
1.
( get)get .
2.
(come) is coming
III. Fill the blanks with the appropriate forms of
the adjectives in brackets(1p)
1.
(expensive) more expensive.
2.
(hot)hottest
3.
(tall)taller
4.
(good)
Part C. Reading: (2,5 ms)
I.
Complete the letter using the words in the box.
(1,5 marks)
1.
staying
; 2.are ;3.noisy
4. cleaner ; 5.air ;6.backyard
II.Read the E-mail and answer the following
questions.( 1p)
1.
Now,he’s staying in a small hotel near a
shopping area in District 10.
2.
It is very noisy here because there’s always a lot
Words
desert
best
coast
boat
lost
boot
Number
6
1
3
2
4
5
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
*Homework:
- Prepare the next lesson
of traffic, day and night.
3.
There are some small shops, a school and a
market in his neighbourhood
4.
No, there isn’t.
Part D. Writing (2ms)
I.
Reorder the words to make the meaningful
sentences.( 1p )
1.
This hotel is more modern than that one.
2.
Take the second turning on the left.
3.
Is there a square near your house?
4.
You must do your homework at home.
II. Rewrite these sentences so that it has the
same meaning as the root ones. (1P)
1.
Viet Nam doesn’t have any deserts.
-> There aren’t any deserts in Viet Nam.
2.
No one in my class is more beautiful than Hanh.
-> Hanh is the most beautiful girl in my class
3.
The hospital is on the left of the museum.
-> The museum is on the right of the hospital.
4.
My house is smaller than Lan’s house.
-> Lan’s house is bigger than my house.
*Homework:
- Prepare the next lesson :Communication
Date of planning: 8 /12/2017 Date of teaching:6A :11/12/2017
PERIOD47 : CHECK THE TEST 2
I.
Aims: - Helping students to recognize the mistakes made in the written test.
II.
Objectives:
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
-
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to recognize the mistakes in their test.
III.
Materials: Test papers which have been marked.
IV.
Procedure:
T’s activities
Ss’ activities
Content
I) Warm up:
-
Greeting.
-
Get the class to sing a
song.
II) New lesson:
-
Give general
comments.
-
Give the test papers
back to ss
-
Give comments in
details.
-
Praise the excellent
students and encourage
the not- good- yet ones.
III) Consolidation:
- Commment in
conclusions.
-
Sing a song
to warm up
the class.
-
Listen.
-
Receive the
test papers
-
Pay
attention
-
Listen
-
Listen to
the
conclusions
to make sure
to do well
next time.
(Clas: 6D,E)
Part A. Listening (2.5ms)
I.
Listen and number the words you hear from 2
to 6. Number 1 is an example. (1.25ps)
II.
Listen to the following conversation and fill
the missing words (1.25ps)
(1) end
(2)right
(3) some
(4)turn
(5) go
Part B. Language focus (3 Ps)
I.
Choose the best answer.( 1.5p)
1.- B. historic ; 2.-D.noisy; 3.- C.painkillers
4.- B. Australia; 5.-A. in ; 6.-C. better
II.
Give the correct form of the following verbs:
( 0.5p)
1.
(come) is coming
2.
(play)play
III.
Fill the blanks with the appropriate forms of
the adjectives in brackets(1p)
1.
(hot)hottest
2.
(tall)taller
3.
(good)better
4.(intelligent)most intelligent
Part C. Reading: (2,5 ms)
I.
Complete the letter using the words in the box.
(1,5 marks)
1.
staying
; 2.are ;3.noisy
4. cleaner ; 5.air ;6.backyard
II.Read the E-mail and answer the following
questions.( 1p)
1.
Now,he’s staying in a small hotel near a
shopping area in District 10.
2.
It is very noisy here because there’s always a lot
of traffic, day and night.
Words
desert
best
coast
boat
lost
boot
Number
6
1
3
2
4
5
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
*Homework:
- Prepare the next lesson
3.
No, there isn’t.
4.
No, there isn’t.
Part D. Writing (2ms)
I.
Reorder the words to make the meaningful
sentences.( 1p )
1.
This hotel is more modern than that one.
2.
Take the second turning on the left.
3.
Is there a square near your house?
4.
You must do your homework at home.
II. Rewrite these sentences so that it has the
same meaning as the root ones. (1P)
1.
Viet Nam doesn’t have any deserts.
-> There aren’t any deserts in Viet Nam.
2.
No one in my class is more beautiful than Hanh.
-> Hanh is the most beautiful girl in my class
3.
The hospital is on the left of the museum.
-> The museum is on the right of the hospital.
4.
My house is smaller than Lan’s house.
-> Lan’s house is bigger than my house.
*Homework:
- Prepare the next lesson :Communication
Date of planning: 9 /12/2017 Date of teaching:6A :13/12/2017
6D,E :14/12/2017
Period 48: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Lesson 4: Communication
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can get to know New Year practices in some other
countries.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “Tet”: things, activities and practices.
2.
Structures:
Will to express intentions.
Should/ shouldn’t for advice.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’
Activities
Content
Time
Pre-
teach
* Presentation:
-
Show Ss the flags of five
countries and ask them if
them know the names of
the countries, where they
are and what else they
know about these
countries.
-
Ask them to do the
matching of flags and
countries.
- Individual
work
1.
Match the flags with the
countries. Then match the
countries with their nationalities.
Key:
1.
Holland (Dutch)
2.
Japan (Japanese)
3.
The USA (American)
4.
Australia (Australian)
5.
Thailand (Thai)
6.
Vietnam (Vietnamese)
7.
Scotland (Scottish)
8.
Korea (Korean)
5
mins
While-
teach
* Practice:
-
Make 8 hats with the
flags at the front . Call 8 Ss
and ask them to wear the
hats.
-
Divide the class into 4
groups and see which
group can call out the right
names the most quickly.
-
Let Ss look at the
pictures, discuss and make
a guess about which
country the pictures are
about.
-
Ask them to match the
pictures with the four
groups of people.
-
Help Ss by drawing their
attention to some details
from the reading and
- Whole
class
- Pair-work
2.
Game.
Prepare pictures of flags. Walk
around and meet people. Tell them
where you are from. They will tell
you your nationalities.
Ex:A:Hi, I’m from England.
B: You’re English.
A:Hi, I’m from Viet Nam.
B: You’re Vietnamese.
3.
People at different countries
celebrate New Year differently.
Match the four groups of people
with the pictures.
Key:
1.
The Scottish, Scotland.
2.
The Thai, Thailand.
3.
The H’Mong, Vietnam.
4.
The Japanese, Japan.
4. Read the four paragraphs
below. Use the pictures in 3 to
10
mins
10
mins
10
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
referring to the pictures
provided in 3.
-
Ask them to underline the
verbs and objects of some
practices.
-
Don’t let Ss do this task
before they spot the words/
phrases as they are used in
the sentence and encourage
them to use the context to
guess the meanings of the
word/ phrase.
- Pair-work
help you decide which group of
people celebrates New Year that
day.
Key:
1.
H’Mong
2. Thai
2.
3. Japanese 4. Scottish
5.
Find and check the meanings of
some new words as they are used
in the text by matching them with
the definitions.
Key:
a.
The covers of a rooster, chicken
or bird.
b.
An adult male chicken.
c.
Take away.
d.
The first person to enter your
home after New Year’s Eve.
mins
Post-
teach
- Have ss work in pairs and
do this activities.
- Group-
work
* Production:
6. Group work
Each Ss choose two facts from the
four paragraphs he/she is most
interested in. write them down and
take turns to read them aloud to
his/ her group. The group decides
which group of people he / she
talking about.
10
mins
*Homework:
- Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning: 10 /12/2017 Date of teaching:6A,D,E :16/12/2017
PERIOD 49:UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
Lesson 5: Skills 1
I.
Objectives:
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
By the end of this lesson, students can get to know New Year practices in some other
countries.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “Tet”: things, activities and practices.
2.
Structures:
Will to express intentions.
Should/ shouldn’t for advice.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities
Content
Time
Pre-
teach
* Presentation:
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures of
children and the names of the
countries first to have some ideas
about which countries they are
going to read about.
- Whole
class
Questions:
-
What is his/ her name?
-
Where is he/ she from?
5
mins
While-
teach
* Practice:
-
Ask Ss to read the text. Allow
them to read a second time and
underline some words they don’t
know.
-
Ask Ss to do this task
individually.
-
Let Ss look back at the
passages as many times as they
would like to.
-
Check with the whole class.
-
Ask Ss not to look back at the
passages and see how many
questions they answer right.
-
Individual
work
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
I.
Reading
1.
Children in different
countries are talking about
their New Year. Read the
passages.(Page 64)
2.
Say who the following
statement refer to. Number 1
is an example.
A.
Russ
B. Wu C. Mai
Key:
1.
C
5. B
2.
A
6. C
3.
B
4.
C
3.
Test your memory! Tick the
things which appear in the
passages, and cross the ones
which don’t.
Key:
Appear
Don’t
appear
a
d
b
e
c
h
f
j
g
i
10
mins
10
mins
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
-
Revise what Ss have learnt in 1,
both vocabulary and practices.
Encourage Ss to give more
activities than ones provided in
the passages.
-
Turn this into a free activities
for Ss to talk about New Year
beliefs both in their country and
in others. Ask them to write two
popular beliefs you know about
the New Year and tell your
partners. Get Ss to talk.
- Pair-work
- Group-
work
II. Speaking
4. The following practices
and beliefs are from the
passages in 1. Talk to your
friends and say which one(s)
you will do or won’t do this
New Year.
Example:
1. I won’t go to the Time
Square to welcome the New
Year.
5. Work in groups.
Write two popular beliefs you
know about the New Year
and tell your partners.
10
mins
Post-
teach
- Have Ss discuss with their
friends what they should or
shouldn’t do at Tet.
- Pair -work
* Production:
6. Look at the list. Discuss
with your friends what you
should or shouldn’t do at Tet.
Example:
A: We should make a wish.
B: I agree. But we shouldn’t
get up early.
10
mins
*Homework:
- Prepare the next lesson:
UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
Lesson 6: Skills 2
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can listen to get the information about Tet activities and
write an email to friend about their Tet holiday.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “Tet”: things, activities and practices.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
2.
Structures: Will
to express intentions.
Should/ shouldn’t for advice.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’
Activities
Content
Time
While-
teach
-
Let Ss look at the
list and read them
aloud. Make sure
they pronounce the
words correctly. This
will help them
recognize the key
words in the
listening.
-
Play the tape three
times and ask them
which words from
- T whole
class
* Presentation:
Listening
1. Mai and her mother are going
shopping for Tet. Listen and tick the
things they will buy.
Key:
1. peach blossoms
3.
new clothes
4.
a tie
5.
sweets
7. chocolate biscuits
15
mins
While-
teach
-
This activity can be
done only after one
has been successfully
completed.
-
Ask Ss to look
carefully at the list
things Mai and her
mother will buy.
Then look at the list
of people as a guide
so that they will
focus on these people
for the listening.
- Individual
work
* Practice:
2. Listen again and write the names
of things they will buy for the people
in column A.
Key:
1.
Clothes
2.
A tie
3. Some sweets
15
mins
Post-
teach
- Ask Ss to write an
e-mail to a friend
about their Tet
holiday
- Individual
work
* Production:
Writing
3. Now write an e-mail to a friend
about your Tet holiday. Include
what you will and won’t do. Also
include things people should and
shouldn’t do. Use your notes from
Speaking and the rest of the unit to
help you.
15
mins
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
*Homework:
-
Write the e-mail into your notebook.
-
Prepare the next lesson
UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
Lesson 7: Looking Back
I.
Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can review all what they have learnt in this unit.
II.
Language Focus:
1.
Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “Tet”: things, activities and practices.
2.
Structures:
Will to express intentions.
Should/ shouldn’t for advice.
III.
Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures.
IV.
Procedures:
Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’
Activities
Content
Time
Pre-teach
- Ask Ss to draw line to
match the actions on the
- Individual
* Presentation:
Vocabulary
5
left with the things on the
right.
work
1. Draw line to match the
actions on the left with the
things on the right.
Key:
1. j ; 2. e; 3. d; 4. c; 5. i; 6. f
7. h; 8. g; 9. a; 10. k; 11. b
mins
While-
teach
-
Ask Ss to play a game.
This game is for Ss to
revise the Tet vocabulary,
not only in meaning but
also in pronunciation. It
also trans Ss’ memory and
quick reactions.
-
Show Ss a picture of
New year in Thailand and
ask if they could still
remember anything about
New Year Festival in
Thailand.
-
Ask them questions:
when is New Year
Festival in Thailand?,
What is the weather
like?...
-
Ask them to look at the
list and make up sentences
of what Phong will or
won’t do in Thailand.
-
Ask Ss to look at the
summary first and see
how much they can fill in
before the listening.
-
Individual
work
-
Pair-work
-
Individual
work
* Practice:
2.
Game: “About or Not about
Tet?”
Five volunteer stand in front of
the class. They take turn to
read aloud each phrase from
the list. The quickest student
with the right answer gets one
point for one right answer. The
student with the highest score
wins.
Grammar
3.
Phong is visiting Thailand at
their New Year Festival. Look
at the list of what he will or
will not do. Then write out
complete sentences.
Key:
Will
Phong will travel by plane.
Phong will wear shorts and a
T-shirt.
Phong will get wet.
Phong will throw water at
others.
Phong will watch the
elephants.
Won’t
Phong won’t stay at home.
Phong won’t eat banh chung.
Phong won’t go to school.
Phong won’t get lucky money.
Phong won’t wait for the first
footer.
4.
Tom is asking Phong what
children in Vietnam should or
shouldn’t do at Tet. Listen and
fill in the summary with should
10
mins
10
mins
10
mins
- Play the recording and
check if Ss get the right
answer.
or shouldn’t.
Key:
1.
Should
4. Shouldn’t
2.
Should
5. Shouldn’t
3.
Should
6. Should
Post-teach
- Ask Ss to rearrange the
words in each sentence to
make New Year wishes
and greetings.
- Pair-work
* Production:
Communication
5. Rearrange the words in each
sentence to make New Year
wishes and greetings.
Key:
1.
I wish you a Happy New
Year.
2.
Have a great year with your
studies.
3.
I wish you success in your
career.
4.
I wish you a joyful year.
10
mins
*Homework:
- Do project” on page 67.
| 1/108

Preview text:

English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 13/8 /2017
Date of teaching:6A,D,E :17 /8 /2017
PERIOD 2:UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Lesson 1: Getting Started :A specialday I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can know the key language and structures to be learnt in this unit. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the items related to the school.
2. Structures: The present simple and the present continuous tense.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, picture. IV. Procedures: Part Teacher Students Content Time Pre-teach: -Whole class
* Presentation: Pre-
- Write the title on the board
Guess what the picture teach:
‘A special day’. Explain the
might show or what the
meaning of ‘special’ and ask conversation might be Ss to guess what the picture about. might show or what the - What is Phong doing? conversation might be about. - Who are Vy and Phong? 5 - Let Ss open their books and - Why is it a special day? mins check their answers. - Ask Ss questions about the picture. While-teach:
1. Listen and read: - Listen
and 1. Listen and read - Play the recording read
* Practice:
a) True or false:
a) Are these sentences true
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue or false?
again and decide whether the - Individual Key: statements are true or false. work 1. T 2. T 3. F - Allow Ss to share answers 4. T 5. F before discussing as a class. 10 While- mins teach:
b) Special expression:
b) Find these expressions in
- Tell Ss to refer back to the the conversation. Check
conversation to find the what they mean expressions. Key: - Practice saying them - Pair-work 1. Used to express surprise together. (negative). 2. ‘You’ll find out.’ - Whole class 3. Used to invite sb in. 4. Used to say c) Role play: ‘yes’/‘alright’. - Ask Ss to role-plays the
c. Create short role-plays School year: 2018-2019 1
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
short conversations in pairs
with the expressions. Then
before creating short role- practice them. plays. - Pair-work
- Ask Ss to extend the conversations. - Pair-work 2. Listen and read the
2. Listen and read the poem: poem. - Play the recording. - Listen and Example:
- Let Ss read the poem in the repeat
Khanh is going to back to
right intonation and rhythm school today. While- and check their
His friends are going back 10 teach: understanding of the poem. to school, too. mins - Ask Ss to write a poem
His new school year starts
about their partner, then read - Individual today. them poem aloud. work He’s got a new bike. His friends are on their way. 3. School things
3. Match the words with the vocabulary:
school things. Then listen
- Ask Ss to match the words - Individual and repeat. with the school things. work Key: - Play the recording.
1 – b 2 – e 3 – j
- Let Ss to practice saying the
4 – d 5 – c 6 – i 5 names of school things. - Whole class
7 – f 8 – a 9 – g mins - Allow Ss to check their - Group work 10 – h answer in groups. - Tell Ss to look around the
* Production: class. Ask what they see
4. What other things do you around them/ what they have.
have in your class?
- Let Ss to practice the words, Example: 5 and make up the sentences Table, desk, noticeboard, mins with the words it there is picture, flowers… time. Post- Post-teach: 2 teach: Recall all the knowledge mins
*Homework:
- Write the items related to school in the book.
- Prepare next lesson (A closer look 1) School year: 2018-2019 2
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 14/8 /2017
Date of teaching:6A:19/8/2017 6D,E :8 /8 /2017
PERIOD 3:UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can pronounce correctly the sounds /əʊ/ and /ʌ/ in isolation and in context. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the subjects in the school. 2. Structures: o The present simple. o
The combinations: to study, to have, to do, to play + Noun.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player. IV. Procedures: Part Teacher Students Content Tim e Pre-teach:
* Warm-up: - Ask students to name - Whole Subjects: 5 some subjects they learn. class
Math, music, English, … mins
* Presentation:
1. Listen and repeat the Vocabulary words
1. Listen and repeat the words - Play the recording. - Listen physics; exercise; English; - Play it again and pause - Listen and
vocabulary; history; football; 5 for Ss to repeat each word. repeat homework; lessons; judo; mins
- Correct Ss’ pronunciation. music; school lunch; science While-
2. Work in pairs. Put the
* Practice: teach: words in 1 into groups
2. Work in pairs. Put the words VOCABUL
- Ask Ss to put the words in - Pair-work
in 1 into groups. ARY 1 into groups. Key: - Explain to Ss which play football, music words go with each verb. do
homework, judo, exercise have school lunch, lessons 5
Physics, English, history,mi ns
study vocabulary, science.
3. Put one of these words - Individual
3. Put one of these words in in each blank work each blank. 5 - Ask Ss to write on the Key: mins board, then check their 1. Homework answers. 2. Football 3. Lessons 4. Judo School year: 2017-2018 3
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 5. Science
4. Write sentences about
4. Write sentences about yourself using the
yourself using the combinations combinations above above. - Ask Ss to write sentences - Pair-work Example: 5 about themselves in their I/We have English lessons on mins notebooks, using the Tuesday and Thursday. combinations above. … 5. Listen and repeat
Pronunciation /əʊ/ and /ʌ/ - Ask Ss to practice the - Listen and
5. Listen and repeat. Pay 5 sounds /əʊ/ and /ʌ/. Play repeat.
attention to the sounds /əʊ/ and mins the recording and ask Ss to /ʌ / listen and repeat. 6. Sort the words
6. Listen to the words and put - Play the recording twice. - Individual them into two groups. - Let Ss check their work. Key: answers in groups. /əʊ/ /ʌ / 5 - Call some Ss to write rode some mins their answers on the board. don’t Monday - Correct the mistakes. hope month homework come While- post one teach:
7. Listen, repeat &
* Production: PRONUNC underline the words.
7. Listen and repeat. Underline IATION - Play the recording twice. - Listen and
the sounds /əʊ/ and /ʌ/ you 5 - Help them to recognize repeat hear. mins two sounds. Key: - Ask ss to underline them - Individual
1. They are going to open a new in the sentences. work library. 2. I’m coming home from school.
3. His brother eats lunch in the school canteen. 4. The new school year starts next month. 5. My brother is doing his homework. 6. He goes to the judo club every Sunday. Post-teach: Recall all the knowledge 5 mins
*Homework:- Learn vocabulary by heart.- Prepare next lesson (A closer look 2)
Date of planning: 18/8 /2017
Date of teaching:6A,E :22 /8 /2017 6D:21/8/2017 School year: 2017-2018 4
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
PERIOD 4:UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use the present simple and the present continuous. II. Language Focus: Structures: o
The present simple and present continuous tense.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player. IV. Procedures: Part Teacher Students Content Time
* Warm-up: Pre-teach: - Have Ss to play a game. - Group Noughts and Crosse: 5 work play like read mins listen do visit make watch cook E
x: She often plays chess after school. While-teach:
* Presentation: Grammar - Ask Ss to give the rule and - Listen
The present simple
use of the present simple and - Listen and Positive: the present continuous tense repeat
I/ you/ we/ they + V(work, study) themselves.
He/ she /it + V-s/ V-es.(works, - Let them study the grammar studies) box. Negative: 5 - Give more examples if
I/ you/ we/ they + don’t / do not mins necessary. + V
He/ she /it + doesn’t/ does not + V
Questions and short answer: Do I/ you/ we/ they + V? Yes, I/ you/ we/ they do. No, I/ you/ we/ they don’t. Does He/ she /it + V? Yes, He/ she /it + does. No, He/ she /it + doesn’t.
* Practice:
1. Write the correct form of Key: the verbs - Individual 1. has 2. do you have 5 - Let Ss to do the task work 3.love mins individually.
4. does vy walk 5. ride 6. - Correct their answers.
teaches 7. doesn’t play 8. reads 9. go 10. do
2. Correct the sentences.
2. Correct the sentences
- Allow Ss to write the - Pair-work according to the information in 5 School year: 2017-2018 5
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 sentences in their notebooks, (1) above. mins referring to the interview. Key:
- Call 1 or 2 Ss to write on the
1. Duy lives near here. board, check their answers
2. Duy likes/loves his new sentence by sentence. school.
3. Vy and Duy ride to school.
4. Mr Quang teaches Duy English.
5. At break time, Phong reads in the library. 3. Make questions then 3. Make questions
then - Pair-work interview your partner. 5
interview your partner. Key: mins - Ask Ss to take turns to ask
1. Do you ride your bike to questions and give answers. school? - Go around and correct their
2. Do you read in the library at mistakes or give help when the break time? necessary.
3. Do you like your new school?
4. So your friends go to school with you?
5. So you do your homework after school?
4. Fill and underline the - Individual 4. Fill and underline the present 5
present continuous form work. continuous form. mins - Ask Ss to refer to the
The present continuous: conversation in Getting Positive: started. Focus on the verbs S + to be + Ving. used in the present Negative: continuous. S + to be not+ Ving. - Ask Ss to listen and follow
Questions and short answer: the conversation on page 6 To be + S + Ving? (twice). Yes, S + to be - Ask Ss to underline the No, S + to be not. present continuous form.
5. Complete the sentences - Group-
5. Complete the sentences with 5 - Have Ss study the example work
the correct form of the verbs. mins first. Key: - Ask Ss to give the correct 1. Am not playing form of the verbs. 2. Are studying
- Ask Ss to say why to use the 3. Aren’t doing School year: 2017-2018 6
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 tense in each sentence. 4. Am having 5. Are riding
6. Choose the correct tense - Group
6. Choose the correct tense of of the verbs work the verbs. 5
- Ask Ss to choose the correct Key: mins tense of the verbs. 1. Are having - Ask Ss to discuss any 2. Wears common errors and provide 3. Starts
further practice if necessary. 4. Is watching 5. Are skipping
7. Read Vy’s email to her - Group-
7. Read Vy’s email to her friend. work friend. - Ask Ss to underline things
that often happen or are fixed.
Then underline things that are happening now.
- Help Ss to compare Vy’s - Individual Compare Vy’s first week with first week with their work yours. individually. Ex: - Correct the mistakes
Both Vy and I are having an interesting first week.
I wear my uniform every day, but Vy wears her uniform only on Mondays and Saturday. Post-teach Recall all the knowledge 5 mins
*Homework:
- Prepare next lesson (Communication) School year: 2017-2018 7
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 19/8 /2017
Date of teaching:6A,D,E :23 /8 /2017
PERIOD 5:UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Lesson 4: Communication I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use appropriate questions when making new friends at a new school. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: pocket money, remember, share, help, classmate.
2. Structures: The present simple tense.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pieces of paper. IV. Procedures: Part Teacher Students Content Time Pre-teach:
* Presentation: 5
- Have Ss guess the meaning - Whole class Guess the meaning of the mins of the vocabulary. vocabulary:
- Tell Ss that this vocabulary - pocket money(n): will appear in the task that - remember(v): follow. - share(v): - help (v): - Ask Ss how they often - Answer - classmate(n): make friends, what they often say when they first meet a new friends, what
questions they often ask, etc. 1. Game: Making friend - Group-work
1. Game: Making friend. - Ask Ss to read and tick the Read and tick the questions.
questions you think are - Allow Ss to discuss in suitable to ask a new groups. friends at school - Ask Ss why or why not they ticked this or that question. - Allow Ss some time to write questions on a piece of paper, share them with the class or group. School year: 2017-2018 8
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 2. Survey: 2. There is a quiz for
- Ask Ss to give the qualities - Whole class
students in the new school of a good friend in class newsletter. Read the (adjectives). They can give questions. as many words as possible. Example: Friendly,
- Divide class into groups of generous, helpful, 4 or 5. Ss take turns to - Group-work
cheerful, humorous, kind, interview the other reserved members, using the Example: While- questions. “Friends are forever” teach:
- Encourage Ss to give nice 35 sentences about friendship mins Presentation: - Choose some Ss to present - Whole class to the class about their good Present to the class about friends and why they are your good friends and why good friends. (avoid talking they are good friends. about someone who is considered “not a good friend”). Post-teach Recall all the knowledge 5 mins
*Homework:
- Learn new vocabulary and questions to make friends.
- Prepare next lesson: (Skills 1) School year: 2017-2018 9
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 20/8 /2017
Date of teaching:6D,E :24/8 /2017 6A:26/8/2017
Period 6:UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL Lesson 5: Skills 1 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can read and talk about school activities, subjects, and what Ss do at school. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: boarding, surrounded, international, creative
2. Structures: The present simple tense.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pieces of paper. IV. Procedures: Part Teacher Students Content Tim e
Pre-teach: Check the previous lesson’s Answer 5 knowledge questions mins
1. Read the text quickly to
* Presentation: check your ideas Look at the picture.
- Ask the class to look at the - Whole class
What do they tell you about three pictures first. the school? - Encourage Ss to give their (pictures on page 22) ideas (as many sentences as  Reading possible).
1. Read the text quickly to check your ideas - Ask Ss to read the three - Individual passages quickly and check work
their ideas. Set a strict time
* Practice: While- limit to ensure Ss read
2. Now find these words in the teach: quickly for information.
text. What do they mean? 30 READIN
- It is a boarding school. That mins G
2. Now find these words in means many Ss study and live the text. What do they there. mean?
- The school is surrounded by - Ask Ss to read the passages - Pair-work mountains and green fields. again, then find the words in
- … international school … the passages. for Ss from year 1 to year 2, - Help them to give the Ss learn English with foreign meaning of the words, or teachers… explanations, or examples, or (inter + national) Vietnamese equivalent.
- Some creative students do - Tell Ss to pay attention to drawings and paintings in the the context of the words art club.
3. Now read the text again
3. Complete these sentences
and complete these sentences. - Set a longer time limit for Key: Ss to reread the text and - Boarding School year: 2017-2018 10
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 complete the sentences. - Vinabrita - Ask Ss to note where they - Australia found the information that - Mountains help them complete the
- English speaking teachers. sentences. - Individual - Have Ss to compare their work answer. - Allow Ss to read in chorus once. Then call some individuals to read aloud to Speaking the class. Check their
4. Which school would you
pronunciation and intonation.
like to go to? Why? First
complete the table. Then 4. Fill in the table
discuss with your friends. - Ask Ss to refer back the Background of the school: three schools. Give the PLC Sydney: an international background of the schools. school for girls from
- Ask Ss to complete the table kindergarten to year 12 in in their notebooks. Sydney, Australia. An Lac Lower Secondary School: a small school in a - Individual mountainous region in Son While- work Dong Dist, Bac Giang teach: Province. SPEAKIN Vinabrita School: an G international school for from year 1 to year 12 in Ha Noi.
* Production: Post-
- Divide the class into groups - Group-work Discuss: 10 teach: of 4 or 5, let them discuss
- Which school (among the mins their answers to the
three above) would you like to questions, and give reasons. go? Why? - Ask some Ss to talk to the
class, then the class give their comments on their friends’ content, pronunciation, fluency, language, body language, etc.
*Homework: - Practice speaking more.
- Prepare next lesson: (Skill 2)
Date of planning: 25/8 /2017
School year: 2017-2018 11
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of teaching:6A,E :29 /8 /2017 6D: 28/8 /2017
PERIOD7:UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL Lesson 6: Skills 2 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can listen to get information about school activities and
write a webpage for their school, using correct punctuation. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: webpage, punctuation.
2. Structures: The present simple and present continuous tense.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, poster. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Time
* Presentation: - Ask Ss to refer back to - Whole class Questions: the reading : PLC Sydney
- Give the full name of the 5 and answer. PLC Sydney School. mins Pre-teach
- Do you like PLC Sydney school? Why? Why not?
* Practice: Listening 10 - Play the recording. Ask - Individual
1. Susie is a student at PLC mins Ss to listen only the first work
Sydney. Listen and choose time. Then play the the correct answer. recording again and allow Key: Ss to choose the correct 1. A 2. A answers as they listen. 3. B 4. B - Allow Ss share their - Whole class 5. A
answers before listening to Writing the recording a final time
A webpage for school to check. Writing Tip – good 10 punctuation. mins While-teach - Individual - Tell the class the work 2. Can you correct the importance of punctuation punctuation in these marks. Allow some time sentences? for the Ss to study the Key: writing tip. Explain to Ss 1. School starts on the 5th the new words and September. punctuation marks. 2. Does he live in Ha Noi? - Ask Ss to correct the 3. I’m excited about the punctuation in the first day of school. sentences in their 4. Are you doing your notebooks. homework? School year: 2017-2018 12
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 - Call 5 Ss to write the 5
5. We’re having an English sentences on the board. lesson in class. - Let the class comment and check. 3. Can you correct the - Give correction.
passage? Write the correct version. Key: - Play the recording twice.
Hi, I’m Phong and I’m from 10 Let Ss write the words in Ho Chi Minh City. I wear mins the correct places. my uniform to school every day. My favourite teacher is Mr Trung. He teaches me science. - Allow Ss to refer back to
4. Create a webpage for the reading for useful your school. language, and note interesting expressions and language on the board. - Show a webpage to inspire Ss. - Tell Ss to write a draft first, trying to answer all the questions. - Ask Ss to write a paragraph of about 80 words about their school. - Choose some Ss to
* Production: 10 present to the class about - Whole class Present to the class about mins their writing. their writing. - Tell Ss to pay attention to Post-teach punctuation, structure elements, linking words, etc. - Give correction.
*Homework:
- Write a paragraph in your notebook. - Prepare next lesson School year: 2017-2018 13
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 26/8/2017
Date of teaching:6A,D,E : 30/8/2017
PERIOD8:UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL Lesson 7: Looking Back I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can review all what they have learnt in this unit. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: webpage, punctuation. 2. Structures:
The present simple and present continuous tense.
Verb (study, have, do, play) + Noun
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, poster. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Time
* Presentation: - Tell Ss to write the words - Individual  Vocabulary in their notebooks. Then T work
1. Write words that match the corrects the mistakes. pictures. - Let Ss repeat the words. - Repeat Key:
- Check their pronunciation 1. Dictionary 5 2. Uniform mins Pree-teach 3. Pencil sharpener 4. Notebook 5. Compass 6. Calculator - Have Ss match the words - Individual
2. Match the words in A with in A with ones in B. work the ones in B Key: 1. B 2. C 3. A 4. D
* Practice: 10 - Play the recording twice. - Individual
3. Listen. Then write down the mins Let Ss write the words in work
words you hear in the correct the correct places. places. - Give correction. Key:
- Play: sport, badminton, music. - Do: morning exercise, homework.
- Study: new words, geography. While-teach
- Have: English lessons, a new book. - Ask Ss to do these exercises (4, 5, 6) in - Individual  Grammar individually first. Then work
4. Complete the sentences with they can check their
- Pair - work the present simple. 10 answers with a partner Key: mins before discussing the 1. Comes 2. Don’t 3. Walks answers as a class. 4. Do 5. Teaches 6. Play - Tell Ss to keep a record School year: 2017-2018 14
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
of their original answers so
5. Complete the sentences with they can use that
the present continuous.
information in their Now Key: you can… statements. 1. are doing 2. Are riding 3. is … studying 4. is having 5. am walking 6. is teaching - Ask Ss to read the - Individual
6. Complete the text with the 10 questions and answers once work
correct form of the verbs in mins or twice, then match them. brackets. - Have Ss write all the Key: sentences in their 1. live 2. is 3. has notebooks. 4. is walking 5. go 6. Study 7. are working 8. loves Communication
7. Match the questions with the correct answers. Key:
b – g d –f e –a h – c - Ask Ss work in pairs and
- Pair - work * Production: 10 role play the questions and
8. Now role play the questions mins answers. and answers. - Ask Ss to complete the Finished! Now you can… Post-teach self- assessment. Identify and difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice.
*Homework:
- Show more examples of the different types of school if possible. - Prepare next lesson
Date of planning: 3/9/2017
Date of teaching:6A,D,E :6 /9/2017 School year: 2017-2018 15
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
PERIOD 9: UNIT 2: MY HOME
Lesson 1: Getting Started - A look inside
I. Objectives:By the end of this lesson, students can know the key language and structures to be learnt in this unit. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My home”. 2. Structures: There is / There isn’t There are / There aren’t Prepositions of place.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, picture. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’ Content T Activities - Ask Ss to guess what the
* Presentation: 5’
picture might show or what the T- Whole
Guess what the picture might show conversation might be about. class
or what the conversation might be - Ask Ss questions about the about. picture. Ex: Pre- - Ask Ss to share any recent - What are Nick and Mi doing? teach
experiences of chatting online. (talking on Skype; Skype = a
- Ask Ss to talk a bit about the
system that allows you to make place where you live. telephone calls using your computer and the internet).
- Talk a bit about the place where you live.
* Practice: 10’ - Play the recording - Listen
1. Listen and read - Ask Ss to give the answers and read
a. Which family members does Mi
without reading the conversation - talk about? again. Individual Key:
- Ask Ss to read the conversation work Grandparents and check their answers. Dad ✓ Confirm the correct answers. Mum ✓ Brother ✓ While- Uncle teach Aunt ✓ - Have Ss work independently. Cousin ✓ Allow them to share answers b. Re
ad the conversation again. before discussing as class.
Complete the sentences. - Ask Ss to write the correct Key: answers on the board. - 1. TV; sofa 2. Town house - Ask Ss if they know the Individual 3. sitting on the sofa 4. noisy prepositions in the box. work 5. three
- Have Ss do exercise 2 in pairs.
2. Match the prepositions with the - Ask for Ss’ answers. School year: 2017-2018 16
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 pictures. 10’
- Ask Ss to write the sentences Key: individually, then share the A. on B. next to C. behind sentences with a friend.
- Pair-work D. in E. in front of
- Call on some Ss to write their F. between G. under answer on the board.
3. Write a sentence to describe
- Check the sentences with the
each picture in 2. 10’ whole class. - Key: Individual A. The dog is on the chair work
B. The dog is next to the bowl. C. The cat is behind the TV.
D. The cat is in the wardrobe.
E. The dog is in front of the kennel.
F. The cat is between the lamp and
- Ask Ss to look at the picture of the sofa. the room and do exercise
G. The cat is under the table. individually.
4. Write true of false for each - Have Ss share their answers
sentence. Correct the false ones. before giving the answer. Key:
- Confirm the correct answers. 1. F (The dog is between the bookshelf and the bed). - 2. T Individual
3. F (The clock is between the work pictures).
4. F (The cat is in front of the - Pair-work kennel).
5. F (The cap is next to the pillow). 6. T
* Production: 10’
- Ask Ss to look at the picture
- Pair-work 5. Look at the picture again. and answer the questions.
Answer the questions. - Correct their answers Key: Post- 1. They are on the desk. teach 2. They are on the floor. 3. Yes, it is. 4. No, they aren’t.
5. It’s behind the bookshelf. 6. No, it isn’t.
*Homework:
- Write the answer in your notebook. - Prepare next lesson School year: 2017-2018 17
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 4/9/2017
Date of teaching:6A :9 /9/2017 6A,E:7/9/2017
PERIOD 10:UNIT 2: MY HOME
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can pronounce correctly the sounds /z/, /s/ and /iz/ in isolation and in context. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My home”. 2. Structures: There is / There isn’t There are / There aren’t Prepositions of place.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, picture. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’Activities Content T
* Presentation: 5’ Vocabulary - Have Ss quickly match
- Individual 1. Name the rooms of the house. the room with its name. work kitchen hall Pre-teach - Explain the meaning of bedroom bathroom “hall”. living room attic - Quickly check the answers.
* Practice: 10’ - Ask Ss to work in pairs
- Pair-work 2. Name the things in each room in 1 to do this activity. Key: - Write the name of the
Livin Lamp, sofa, picture, table. room on the board, in g different places. Call on room
Ss from different pairs to
Bedro Bed, lamp, picture, chest
go to the board and write om of drawers. the name of the furniture
Kitch Bridge, cupboard, cooker, under these rooms. en
table, dishwasher, chair. While- - Ask Ss to comment. Hall Picture teach
3. Listen and repeat the words. Can 10’
- Listen and you add more words to the list. repeat. (page 34) - Play the recording. - Ask Ss to listen and
4. Think of a room. In pairs, ask and repeat the words.
answer questions to guess the room. - Ask for more words for - Pair-work Example: each group. A: What’s in the room? - Model this activity with B: A sofa and a television. a Ss. A: Is it the living room? School year: 2017-2018 18
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
- Ask Ss to work in pairs. B: Yes. - Call some pairs to Pronunciation practice in front of the /z/, /s/ and /iz/ class.
5. Listen and repeat the words. - Whole Lamp posters sinks class Fridge tables toilets 10’ Beds wardrobes - Have Ss to read out the words first.
6. Listen again and put the words in
- Play the recording for Ss the correct column. to listen and repeat the /z/ /s/ /iz/ words. - Individual Posters Lamps Fridges - Pay attention to the work Tables Sinks sound: Wardrobe Toilets /z/, /s/ and /iz/ s - Ask Ss to put the words Beds in the correct column
- Final –s is pronounced /z/ after while they listen.
voiced sounds (/b/, /d/, /g/, /n/, /m/, - Have Ss comment on the /l/...) and any vowel sounds. way to pronounce –s/-es
- Final –s is pronounced /s/ after at the end of the words.
voiceless sounds (/t/, /p/, /g/, /k/, /f/, Quickly explain the rules. /θ/). - Ask Ss to do this
- Final –es is pronounced /iz/ after exercise individually first
voiced sounds (/s/, /z/, /ʃ/, /tʃ/, /ʤ/). then compare their
7. Read the conversation below. answers with a partner.
Underline the final s/es in the words Check Ss’answers.
and write /z/, /s/ or /iz/. - Ask Ss to explain their /z/: things, pictures answers. /s/: lights, chopsticks /iz/: dishes, vases
* Production: 10’ - Play the recording for Ss - Pair-work
8. Listen to the conversation and to repeat each line of the
repeat. Pay attention to /z/, /s/ and
Post-teach conversation.
/iz/ at the end of the words. Then - Ask Ss to practice in
practice the conversation with a pair. partner.
*Homework: - Learn vocabulary by heart. - Prepare next lesson School year: 2017-2018 19
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 8/9/2017
Date of teaching:6A,E : 12/9/2017 6D: 11/9/2017
PERIOD 11:UNIT 2: MY HOME
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use There is/ There isn’t/ There are/ There aren’t correctly and appropriately. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My home”. 2. Structures: There is / There isn’t There are / There aren’t
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content T
* Warm-up: 5’ - Have Ss to play a
- Group work Noughts and Crosse: game. cupboard sinks lamp Pre- bedroom posters kitchen teach bathroom window wall
Ex: The cupboard is in the kitchen.
* Presentation: 10’ Grammar - Ask Ss to look at the
- Whole class There is / There isn’t pictures of the two
There are / There aren’t rooms in the grammar. Positive: Ask Ss what the second
Singular: There’s (is) a picture on the room doesn’t have. wall. - Ask Ss to use the
Plural: There are two lamps in the room. There is/ There are Negative: While- structure to make
Singular: There isn’t a picture on the teach sentences. wall. - Elicit the forms
Plural: There aren’t two lamps in the (positive, negative, room. questions and short
Questions and short answer: 10’ answers) from the Ss. Singular: - Have Ss a closer look
- Is there a picture on the wall? at the grammar box,
- Yes, there is. / No, there isn’t. especially the example. Plural:
- Are there two lamps in the room?
- Yes, there are. / No, there aren’t.\
* Practice: 10’ While- - Ask Ss to do exercise - Individual
1. Write is or are. teach 1 and 2 quickly then work
2. Make the sentences in 1 negative. give the answers to T. Key: School year: 2017-2018 20
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
1. is/ isn’t 2. Are/ aren’t
3. are/ aren’t 4. Is/ isn’t - Have Ss to write the 5. are/ aren’t sentences individually - Individual
3. Write positive and negative sentences. then go to the board to work Key: write their sentences.
1. There is/ isn’t a TV next to/ on the table.
2. There is/ isn’t a brown dog in the kitchen.
3. There is/ isn’t a boy in front of the cupboard. - Ask Ss to look at the
4. There is/ isn’t a bath in the bathroom. picture and complete the - Pair-work
5. There are/ aren’t lamps in the description. bedroom.
4. Write is / isn’t / are / aren’t in each - Confirm the correct - Individual
blank to describe the kitchen in Mi’s answers and write them work house. on the board. Key: 1. is 2. is 3. are
4. are 5. aren’t 6. isn’t - Have Ss do this
5. Complete the questions. exercise individually, - Pair - work Key: then give their answers.
1. Is there a fridge in your kitchen?
2. Is there a TV in your bedroom?
3. Are there four chairs in your living room?
4. Is there a desk next to your bed?
5. Are there two sinks in your bathroom?
6. In pairs, ask and answer the questions
in 5. Report your partner’s answer to
the class. - Model the - Pair - work
* Production: 10’ conversation with a Ss
7. Work in pair. Ask your partner about before Ss do this in
his/ her room or the room he/ she likes pairs. best in the house. - Call some pairs act out he conversation in front of the whole group.
*Homework:- Prepare next lesson School year: 2017-2018 21
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 9/9/2017
Date of teaching:6A,D,E :13 /9/2017
PERIOD 12:UNIT 2: MY HOME
Lesson 4: Communication I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use ask about and describe houses, rooms and furniture. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: town house, country house, villa, stilt house, apartment. 2. Structures: There is / There isn’t There are / There aren’t
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Time
* Presentation: 5’ - Have Ss look at extra
- Whole class Extra vocabulary: vocabulary. o Town house o Country house o Villa o Stilt house o Apartment - Ask Ss to look at the - Pair-work
1. Look at the picture of Pre-teach picture and complete the Mi’s grandparents’ sentences. house and complete the sentences. Key: 1. country 2. Are 3. Is 4. Are 5.On 6. Next to 7. on 8. is
* Practice: 10’ - Model the way do do - Pair-work
2. Find the differences this exercise with a St.
between the two houses.
- Ask Ss in each pairs not Example: to look at each other’s
A: Nick lives in a country picture and to make house. Where does Mi similar conversations. live? - Ask Ss to note down the - Individual B: Mi lives in a town differences between the work house. While-teach two houses. - Ask some pairs to act - Pair -work
Suggested questions: 10’ out the conversation. A: How many rooms are - Ask other pairs listen there in Mi’s house? and add more differences
B: There are six rooms. if there are any. What about Nick’s house? How many room are there…? School year: 2017-2018 22
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 - Give Ss 5 – 7 minutes to
3. Draw a simple plan of 10’ draw a simple plan of your house. Tell your their house. partner about your - Have Ss work in pairs to house. tell each other about their house. - Ask Ss to note down the differences between their houses.
* Production: 10’ - Call on some Ss to
- Whole class 4. Describe your friend’s describe their friend’s house to the class. house to the class. - Let Ss present the differences between their house and their friend’s. - Ask Ss listen and give comments.
*Homework:
- Write a paragraph to describe your house in your notebook. - Prepare next lesson School year: 2017-2018 23
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 10/9/2017
Date of teaching:6A :16 /9/2017 6D:18/9 ; 6E:19/9/2017
PERIOD 13:UNIT 2: MY HOME Lesson 5: Skills 1 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can read for specific information about rooms and houses;
describe houses, rooms and furniture. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My home”. 2. Structures: There is / There isn’t There are / There aren’t Prepositions of place.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Time
* Presentation: 5’ - Ask the class to look
- Whole class Study skills – Reading
at the “Study skills – Prediction Reading”. - Predicting makes - Explain any words reading easy. that Ss do not know. - Before reading, look at the picture, design and title. - Decide what is the topic of the text. - Think about what you know about the topic. Pre-teach - Ask Ss to quickly - Answer  Reading look at the text and
1. Answer the questions answer the questions. Key: - Confirm the answers 1. It’s an email. to questions 1 and 2. 2. The title is “A room at Answers to question 3 the Crazy House Hotel, are open. Da Lat” The topic is Nick’s weekend at the - Ask Ss to quickly Crazy House Hotel. read the text and check their ideas from 1.
* Practice: 10’ - Ask Ss to read the - Individual 3. Read the text again text in detail to answer work
and answer the questions. While-teach the questions. Key: - Set a strict time limit 1. No, he isn’t. to ensure Ss read 2. There are ten rooms. School year: 2017-2018 24
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 quickly for 3. Because there’s a big information. tiger on the wall. - Have Ss compare 4. It’s under the bed. their answer before 10’ giving the answers. - Individual
4. Are these things in the - Ask Ss to give work room? evidence when giving Key: the answers. o A window
- Ask Ss to do exercise o A lamp 4. Then compare their o A tiger answers. o A chef
- Correct their answers. o A desk - Individual  Speaking 10’ - Have each St create a work
5. Create a new room for new room for the hotel
the hotel. Draw a plan of and draw a plan of the the room. room.
* Production: 10’ - Ask Ss to show the - Pair -work
6. Show your plan to your plan to a partner. Then
partner then describe the ask Ss to describe their
room to other Ss in the room in pair. class. Post-teach - Ask other Ss to listen and vote for the best plan.
*Homework: - Prepare the next lesson School year: 2017-2018 25
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 16/9/2017
Date of teaching:6A: 19 /9/2017 6D,E:20/09/2017
PERIOD 14:UNIT 2: MY HOME Lesson 6: Skills 2 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can listen to get information about rooms and houses; write an e-mail to a friend. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My home”. 2. Structures: There is / There isn’t There are / There aren’t Prepositions of place.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, a large-sized piece of paper. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Time
* Presentation: 5’ - Ask Ss to took at the plan
- Group-work Look at the picture. Put the of the room and furniture on furniture in the place you page 23; Ask them to put like. Pre-teach the furniture in the place The room at a hotel. they like. Furniture: fireplace, wardrobe, table, bed, shelf, stool, sofa.
* Practice: 10’
- Play the recording. Ask Ss Listening to draw the furniture in the - Individual 1. Listen and draw the correct place as they listen. work
furniture in the correct - Allow Ss share their place. answers before listening to
the recording a final time to check. - Correct their answer. - Ask Ss to describe Nick’ parents’ room again. Writing 10’ While-teach
An e-mail to a friend
Writing Tip – How to write - Ask Ss to read the Writing
- Whole class an e-mail to a friend. tips box. Explain anything Ss do not understand. - Questions: - Ask them several a. How many parts are questions. - Answer there in an e-mail to your - Copy a sample of an e- friend? mail and show Ss each part. b. What are they? c. What should you remember when writing each part? School year: 2017-2018 26
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 - Individual - Ask Ss to look at Nick’s work.
2. Read Nick’s e-mail email on page 22 and
again. Identify the subject, identify the parts in the
greeting, introduction, email.
body and conclusion of the - Check and confirm the e-mail. correct answer.
- Use this e-mail as a model to teach the e-mail parts. - Ask Ss to do this exercise 10’ in pairs.
3. Read the e-mail below
- Write the email on a large-
and correct it. Write the
sized piece of paper and ask correct version in the Ss to go to the board to do provided. this exercise. - Correct their answers. - Ask Ss to close their - T whole books. Tell Ss that in this class
4. Write an e-mail to Nick. writing section, they will
Tell him about your idea follow the writing process.
for the new room of the Write the three letters P, D Crazy House Hotel. and C on the board and ask them to guess what these letters stand for. - Have Ss open their book to check their guess. Explain the process of writing again. Ask Ss to look at the plan of the room they created in the previous lesson. - Ask Ss to write their e-
* Production: 10’ mail individually. Ask one - Individual Write an email to Nick St to write the e-mail on the work Post-teach board. Other Ss and T comment on the e-mail. - Collect some e-mail to correct at home.
*Homework:
- Write your e-mail in your notebook. - Prepare next lesson School year: 2017-2018 27
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning: 17/9/2017
Date of teaching:6A: 20 /9/2017 6D,E:21/09/2017
PERIOD 15:UNIT 2: MY HOME Lesson 7: Looking Back I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can review all what they have learnt in this unit. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My home”. 2. Structures: There is / There isn’t There are / There aren’t Prepositions of place.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’ Content Ti Activities me
* Presentation: 5’ - Tell Ss to write the - Individual  Vocabulary words in their notebooks. work
1. Put The words into the correct Then T corrects the
groups. Do you want to add any mistakes. - Repeat words to each group?
- Let Ss repeat the words. Key: - Check their - Type of building: villa, Pre-teach pronunciation apartment, town house, stilt house, country house. - Rooms: Living room: living
room, hall, bath room, kitchen, - Have Ss match the - Individual attic. words in A with ones in work
- Furniture: picture, cupboard, B.
chest of drawers, wardrobe, sofa, dishwasher, desk.
* Practice: 10’ Grammar - Ask Ss to look at the - Individual 2. Make sentences. Use pictures and do exercise work
appropriate prepositions of individually. places.
- Ask some Ss to write the Key: sentences on the board. 1. The boy is on the table. - Correct Ss’ answers. 2. The dog is in front of the While- - Ask Ss to do exercise 3 - Individual kennel. teach individually. work 3. The cat is between the - Have Ss compare their
- Pair-work bookshelf and the sofa. answers with a partner.
4. The cat is behind the computer. - Check their answers.
5. The girl is in the armchair.
6. The boy is next to the armchair.
3. Look at the picture and
complete the sentences. 10’ - Ask Ss to do exercise 4 Key: School year: 2017-2018 28
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 individually. - Individual 1. There is 2. There are - Have Ss compare their work 3. There is 4. There aren’t answers with a partner. - Pair-work 5. There is 6. There aren’t
- Ask some Ss to write the
4. Turn the sentences in 3 into sentences on the board. questions. - Correct their answers. Key:
1. Is there a clock on the wall.
- Model a way to ask and 2. Are there books on the answer with a student, bookshelf? then divide Ss into - Group-
3. Is there a desk next to the groups. work bookshelf? - Ask Ss to take turns to
4. Are there two posters on the draw a cat in the house in wall? the book. Other Ss ask
5. Is there a laptop and a lamp on questions to find the cat. the desk? - Go around and obverse
6. Are there three small plants in Ss working. the corner?
5. Write six sentences to describe your bedroom. Communication
6. Take turns to draw a cat in the
house below. Other students ask
questions to find the cat. 10’ Example: A: Where is the cat? B: Is it on the bed? A: No, it isn’t. C: Is it under the table? A: Yes, it is.
* Production: 10’ - Ask Ss to complete the
- Individual Complete the self-assessment. self-assessment. Identify work Finished! Now you can… Post-teach any difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice.
*Homework: - Prepare next lesson
Date of planning:22/9/2017
Date of teaching:6D: 25/9/2017 6A,E:26/9/2017 School year: 2017-2018 29
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 Period 16: RIVISION UNIT 1+2 I. The aims:
Review is to revise the language Ss have studied and the skills they have practiced since Unit 1. II. Language Focus:
- Vocabulary:school things, types of house/room/furniture
- Structures: +Present simple tense, present continuous tense
+There is/there are … + Preposition of place
Use the language review as a self-test .Ss do exercises then check their answers
III. Teaching ads: Lesson plan, chalk , …. V. Procedures: T’activities Ss’activities content
Ex1. Find the word which has a different sound in 1.Pronunciation: part underlined. S 1/ A. funny B. lunch C. sun D. computer Individual
Sounds: /əʊ/ and /ʌ/ 2/ A. photo B. going C. brother D. home 3/ A. school B. teaching C. chess D. chalk -Ask ss to do ex 1
4/ A. cold B. volleyball C. telephone D. open - Correct
Ex2. Choose the best option (A, B or C) to each space.
1. Every morning, Lan always ...... to school at 6.30 and ...... home at about 11:30. A. go; come B. goes; comes C. go; comes
2. While I ...... at school, my Dad ...... to the company. 2. Vocabulary & A. study; go
B. am studying; is going C. study; is Grammar: going *Review:
3. At break time, I ...... to the library and ...... books. +Present simple tense, A. read; go B. goes; reads C. go; read present continuous tense
4. My sister usually ...... to school by bike, and my
mother ...... to work by motorbike.
+There is/there are … A. go; go B. goes; goes C. go; goes
Ex3. Put the verbs in brakets in the correct tense + Preposition of place form.
1. School (finish) ................. at 4.30 p.m every day. -Ask ss to do
2. Listen! ......... they (sing) ............ in the classroom? ex 2,3
3. ...... you often (eat) ......... lunch in the school canteen?
Ex4. Write positive and nagative sentences with the -Correct
present simple or the present continuous.
1/ My friends / go to school by bus. (-)
2/ The library / open at 7:30 AM. (+) 3.Writing
3/ Students / have a break / right now. (-)
4/ I / study English / at the moment. (+) -Ask ss to do ex 4,6
Ex6. Complete each sentence so it means the same as School year: 2017-2018 30
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 the sentences above.
1. I have a bookshelf in my bedroom. There ......
2. We have a sink, a fridge, a cooker and a cupboard in our kitchen. There ...... 4. Homework. -Do exercises in workbook Test 15’
I. Fill (am , is ,are ,don’t ) in each blank.(4ms)
1. My sister ……………having breakfast now.
2. They ……………happy . 3. I ……… like coffe.
4. I ………reading a book now.
II. Choose the correct answer to complete the blanks by circling A,B,C orD.(3ms)
1. At break time, I ........... to the library and ……..... books. A. read - go B. goes - reads C. go - read
2. I usually .............. to school by bike, and my mother ............. to work by motorbike. A. go - go B. goes - goes C. go - goes
3. Every morning, I always .......... to school at 6.30 and ......... home at about 11:30. A. go - come B. goes - comes C. go - comes
III. Complete each sentence so it means the same as the sentence above.(3 ms)
1. The bed is near the desk .
The desk.........................................................................................
2. The dog is in front of the microwave.
The microwave................................................................................................
3. The notebook is on the book.
The book ..........................................................................................
Date of planning:23/9/2017
Date of teaching:6A,D,E: 27/9/2017 School year: 2017-2018 31
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 PERIOD 17: UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 1: Getting Started I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can know the key language and structures to be learnt in this unit. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My friends”. 2. Structures:
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
The Present continuous for future.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, picture. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’Activities Content Ti me
* Presentation: 5’ Write the Unit title on the - Whole Guess what the picture might board “A surprise guess”. class show or what the conversation Explain the meaning of might be about. “surprise”. Ex: - Ask Ss to guess what the - What is Phuc doing? Pre-teach picture might show or what - What are they eating and the conversation might be drinking? about. - Ask Ss questions about the
Share your recent experiences of picture. going on a picnic. - Ask Ss to share any recent
- Play the recording (twice)
* Practice: 10’ - Ask Ss to read the - Individual
1. Listen and read conversation and check their work
a. Put a suitable word in each answers. Confirm the blank. correct answers. Key: - Ask Ss to put a suitable 1. picnic 2. Likes word in each blank. 3. friendly 4. Mai and Chau 5. glasses; long black hair
- Tell Ss to refer back to the 6. working on their school conversation to find the project. While- phrases. Practice saying b. Polite requests and teach them together. - Individual
suggestions. Put the words in the - Ask Ss to pay attention to work correct order. intonation when asking Key: questions. Making and responding to a - Ask Ss to role-play the request: short conversation before
1. Can you pass the biscuits for
demonstrating for the class. me, please? - Encourage Ss to extend the - Pair-work 2. Yes, sure. conversation. Making and responding to a suggestion: School year: 2017-2018 32
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
1. Would you like to sit down? - Demonstrate the game to 2. Oh, sorry. We can’t. the class first. - Ask Ss to play in pairs.
2. Game: Lucky numbers Monitor for any errors in - Individual 1. pass the pen stress or intonation and work 2. play outside 10’ discuss after Ss have 3. move the chair finished playing the game. 4. listen to music 5. turn on the lights. - Have Ss practice the 6. have a picnic. Adjectives.
- Ask Ss to write the correct
Adjectives for personality adjectives in the gaps. Tell
3. Choose the adjectives in the 10’ Ss they will only need 5 of
box to complete the sentences. the 10 adjectives to - Pair-work Key: complete this activity. 1. create 2. Kind
- Play the recording to allow 3. confident 4. Talkative Ss to check their answers. 5. clever
- Tell Ss look back at 3. Ask what word comes after the name. Make some more
4. Complete the sentences - Individual sentences about the class Key: work and write tem on the board. 1. am 2. Is 3. Isn’t
Underline the forms of “be”. 4. aren’t 5. Is 6. Are - Ask Ss to complete the sentences.
* Production: 10’ - Ask Ss to look at the - Group-
5. Game: Friendship Flowers picture and answer the work
In groups of four, each member questions.
writes in the flowers petal two
Post-teach - Correct their answers adjectives for personalities
which you like about the others. Compare and discuss which two
words best describe each person.
*Homework: - Practice the conversation. - Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning:24/9/2017
Date of teaching:6D,E: 28/9/2017 6A:30/9/2017 PERIOD 17: UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS School year: 2017-2018 33
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can pronounce correctly the sounds /b/ and /p/ in isolation
and in context; use vocabulary and structures about body parts and appearance. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the vocabulary about body parts and appearance. 2. Structures:
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
The Present continuous for future.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, flash cards. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Tim e - Ask Ss to match the
* Presentation: 5’ words they know. Vocabulary - Allow Ss to work - Individual Appearances together. Point out the work
1. Match the words with the irregular using the “watch
pictures on the cover page of 4Teen Pre- out” box. Play the magazine. teach recording as many times Watch out! as required to support Ss Eye – eyes pronunciation. Tooth – teeth - Review and test Ss’ Hand – hands comprehension by asking Foot -feet them to respond to
- Explain that some words
* Practice: 10’ go together, but some - Individual 2. Create word webs. don’t. work Key: - Write the adjectives on
- Long/short: legs, arms, tail, hair.
the board and allow Ss to
- Big/small: head, ears, feet, eyes,
attach vocabulary cards to nose. make matches.
- Black/blonde/curly/straight: hair, - Ask Ss to complete the fur.
word webs in their books. - Chubby: face, cheeks. - Round/long: face. - Play the recording. - Listen and 
Pronunciation /b/ and /p/ While- - Ask Ss to listen and repeat.
3. Listen and repeat (page 28) teach repeat the words. Picnic biscuit blonde black big patient - Have Ss practice reading
- Pair-work 4. Listen and circle the words you the words first. hear.
- Play the recording for Ss Key: to listen and do the task. 1. play 2. band 3. Ponytail - Ask Ss to listen while T
- Whole class 4. brown 5. Picnic 6. pretty play the recording.
5. Listen. The practice the chant. - Ask Ss to chant along.
- Group-work Notice the rhythm. Provide further practice by dividing the class into  Grammar School year: 2017-2018 34
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 2 groups. Have groups
Have for descriptions 10’ sing alternate lines. - T whole - Stick some pictures of class people from magazines on the board. Call out a description, and have Ss touch the appropriate picture while repeating the sentence. Next, point to pictures and form sentences. Point out that
do or does is added to the start of questions and the end of answers.
6. Look at the cover page of 4Teen
magazine and make the sentences. - Ask Ss to do this Key: exercise individually first - Individual
1. – Does the girl have short hair? 10’ then compare their work - No, she doesn’t. answers with a partner. 2. Does Harry Potter have big - Check Ss’ answers. eyes? - Ask Ss to match the 3. The dog has a long tail. pictures to the people. - Individual
4. - And you, do you have a round Discuss the answers, and work face? ask Ss to recall parts of - Yes, I do / No, I don’t. the recording that help
7. Phuc, Duong and Mai are talking them to do the matching.
about their best friends. Listen and match. Key: Phuc: c Duong: a Mai: b
- Ask Ss to fill in the gaps
* Production: 10’ by recalling the recording - Pair-work
8. What are the missing words? and using the information
Write is or has. Listen again and Post- in the grammar input box. check your answers teach Play the recording to 1. has 2. Is 3. Has 4. Is allow Ss to check their 5. Has 6 is answers.
*Homework: - Prepare next lesson
Date of planning:29/9/2017
Date of teaching:6A,C: 2/10/2017 6D:5/10 /2017
PERIOD 19:UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2 School year: 2017-2018 35
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use the present continuous to talk about future plans and arrangements. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My friends”. 2. Structures:
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
The Present continuous for future.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’Activities Content Ti me - Organizing
* Warm-up: 5’ - Have ss play alphabet -Whole Alphabet game games class Eg: A- act, ask Pre- - T calls each letter of the B- buy, bring .... teach alphabet - Ask Ss to try to recall a verb beginning with each letter
* Presentation: 10’ - Play the recording and Grammar ask Ss to listen and follow
- Individual The Present continuous for future. the conversation on the work
1. Listen again to part of the page. Play the recoding conversation. again and ask Ss to circle all the verbs. While- - Use grammar box to teach describe actions happening now, and some describe plans for the future. Point out contextual clues, such as use of adverbs of time. - Ask Ss to fill in the table with sentences from the conversation. - Ask them to feedback
- Pair-work 2. Now, underline the present 10’ with reasons for their
continuous in the conversation. choices.
Write them in the table. Actions now Plans for future While-
They’re coming Example: This teach over. evening, we are working on our school project. School year: 2017-2018 36
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
* Practice: 10' - Ask Ss to complete the
3. Write sentences about Mai’s plans sentences individually.
for next week . use the present Remind them to pay - Individual continuous for future.
attention to the “be” verb work
Example: She’s finishing her
and to the spelling of verbs homework. (finish) While- ending. Discuss any Key: teach difficulties before Ss 1. is talking 2. isn’t going attempt 4. 3. is visiting 4. is having - Ask Ss to write N for - Individual
4. Sort them out! Write N for Now actions happening now, and work and F for future. F for future plans. Key: 1. N 2. F 3. N 4. F 5. F 6. N - Have Ss prepare for - Whole
* Production: activity by first writing the class
5. Game: Would you like to come to days Monday to Sunday, my party? and writing activities next
Choose the day of the week that you to each – they should add plan to :
the three activities listed in - Have a party. 5: organizing a party,
- Prepare for the class project. working on a project, going - Go swimming. swimming. They should Post- leave some days free to teach arrange new plans. Example: - Practice the model conversation with the class. Nhung’s week Then ask Ss to mingle and Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun make arrangements with their classmates. Afterward feedback by asking Ss to tell the class about their plans.
*Homework:
- Practice more by using the present continuous for future. - Prepare next lesson
Date of planning:30/10/2017
Date of teaching:6C: 4/10/2017 6A,D:7/10 /2017
PERIOD 20:UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 4: Communication I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can read for specific and general information in texts. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My friends”. School year: 2017-2018 37
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 2. Structures:
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
The Present continuous for future.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Ti me
* Presentation: 5’ - Have Ss look at extra
- Whole class Extra vocabulary: vocabulary. +Choir(n):dàn nhạc hợp xướng +Firework competition(n) +Greyhound racing(n): đua chó săn Pre-
+Field trip(n):chuyến đi thực teach tế +Temple(n) +Volunteer(n) +Independent(a): độc lập +Curious(a): tò mò +Freedom-loving
+Responsible(a) trách nhiệm
+Reliable (a) đáng tin cậy
* Practice: 10’
- Show the picture of the five
1. Read the passage form friends in the magazine. - Pair-work 4Teen magazine.
Discuss the friends with class: where they are come from,
what their name might be, what they might like to do, etc.
- Can bring a map or a global to 10’ show where they are from. - Tell the class they will be
2. Find the star sign of each introduced to some new verbs.
- Whole class friend to find out about their While-
- Ask Ss to the star signs of the
personality. Do you think the teach
five friends in 4Teen magazine.
description is correct? - Ask Ss to look at the
adjectives of personalities in the
star sign and compare them with what they read about the 10’ five friends in 1.
- Have Ss review the star sign - Individual
3. Look at the star sign. Do
description for their own signs. work you agree with the
Ask Ss to tick adjectives they description? agree with. - Allow them to share their - Pair -work thoughts with a partner. Post-
* Production: 10’ teach
- Have Ss play a line-up game.
- Whole class 4. Think about your friends’ School year: 2017-2018 38
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
- Ask Ss to arrange themselves
personalities. What star
in order of birthdays. Support
signs do you think they are? them by reviewing months and
Find out if you are correct!
dates and giving a question and Play a line-up game answer they can use: When’s your birthday?
*Homework:
- Write a paragraph to describe your friend in your notebook. - Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning:7/10/2017
Date of teaching:6A: 9/10/2017 6D,:10/10 /2017
PERIOD 21:UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS Lesson 5: Skills 1 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use read for specific and general information in texts
including advertisements and emails. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My friends”. 2. Structures:
Verbs be and have for descriptions. School year: 2017-2018 39
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
The Present continuous for future.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Ti me
* Presentation: 5’ - Show the class three - Whole class
objects/pictures of objects that Prediction you might use at camp, e.g. What objects you might use at
torch, backpack, hiking shoes. camp.
- Ask the class to guess when Pre- you might use all three teach objects. Then have Ss open their books and check their guesses. - Answer
- Discuss with Ss the features
of advertisements: title, short- texts, eyes-catching, contact
* Practice: 10’ Reading
- Tell Ss this advertisement is - Individual
1. Read the advertisement for the about the Superb Summer work Superb Summer Camp and
Camp. Ask Ss to look at it for
choose the best answer.
2 minutes and try to remember - The camp is for children of
as much as they can. Then ask what age?
the class to cover the page and - What did you see in the tell T what they remember. pictures? - Where will the camp be?
- What can you do at the camp? - When does it happen? - Ask Ss to read and find the Key: While- answers to the questions. Ss 1. b 2. c 3. a teach can underline parts of the 10’ email that help them with the - Individual
2. Read the text quickly. Then
answers. Set a strict time limit work answer the questions. to ensure Ss read quickly for Key: information. Accept any 1. an e-mail reasonable answers.
2. A stay at the Superb Summer
- Set a longer time limit for Ss Camp. to read the text and answer T 3. Yes, he is. or F. Encourage Ss to support - Individual their answers. work
3. Read the text again and write True or False. - Ask Ss to make their own Key: English camp schedule then 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F
ask them to report their results 6. F 7. F School year: 2017-2018 40
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 to class. Speaking - Individual
4. Make your own English camp 10’ work schedule. Morning Afterno o n Day 1 Day 2 Day 3
* Production: 10’
- Go back to the advertisement - Pair -work
5. Take turn. Tell your partner and elaborate the activities
about it. Listen and fill in the listed with Ss. Brainstorm schedule.
ideas onto the board. Ask Ss to Post- use the ideas they Morning Afternoo n teach brainstormed to fill in their Day 1 own schedule. Day 2 - Give each Ss a fixed amount Day 3
of time to speak. Ss can report to the class about their partner’ schedule.
*Homework:
- Write a schedule for yourself. - Prepare the next lesson: (Skills 2)
Date of planning:8/10/2017
Date of teaching:6A: 11/10/2017 6E:10/10 /2017 6D:12/10/2017
PERIOD 22:UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS Lesson 6: SkillS 2 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can listen for specific ideas and write an entry for a magazine using notes. II. Language Focus: School year: 2017-2018 41
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My friends”. 2. Structures:
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
The Present continuous for future.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’ Content Ti Activities me
* Presentation: - Ask Ss to see the - Individual  Listening 5’ photos first. Then point work
1. What do you see in the photos? Choose at the words in the box
the words in the box to fill the table. Then and ask them to do the listen and check. matching. Key: - Play recording for checking and practicing Pre- reading the words. teach
* Practice: - Ask Ss to refer to the
- Individual 2. Which activities do you think may/ may contents of the work
not happen at the Superb Summer Camp. 10’ advertisement. Give Ss Key: time to decide which
- Activities that may happen at the Superb activities are like more
Summer Camp: a, b, d, e, f, g, i. likely to happen at the
- Activities that may not happen: c, h
camp and which are not.
(because the camp is in Ba Vi Mountains) Ask them to explain why they think so. While- teach - Have Ss brainstorm the - Whole
3. Listen to Mr Lee, the camp leader, things that Mr. Lee class
talking on the phone with Phuc’s parents. plans for camp.
What are they doing on Day Two and Day - Play the recording.
- Pair-work Three at the camp? 10’ Ask Ss to listen the first Morning Afternoon time. Then play the Day two recording again and Day three follow Ss to fill in the table as they listen. Ss can share their answer before playing recoding School year: 2017-2018 42
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 a final time to allow pairs to check their  Writing answers. Study skills
Research, draft, check. 10’ - Tell the class three letters can help them to write better. Introduce the rubric: Write a magazine entry. Write about your friends. Then write about your plans.
* Production: 10’ - Encourage Ss not to
- Individual 4. Write for 4Teen magazine about your refer back to the unit. work
plans this weekend with your friends. Instead they can use - Introduce yourself. what they have learnt - Describe your friends. Post- during the unit to help - Describe your plans. teach them answer the questions. That will help Ss see how for they progressed, and which areas need further practice.
*Homework:
- Write your plans in your notebook. - Prepare the next lesson School year: 2017-2018 43
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:8/10/2017
Date of teaching:6A,D: 14/10/2017 6E:12/10/2017
PERIOD 23:UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS Lesson 7: Looking Back I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can review all what they have learnt in this unit. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My friends”. 2. Structures:
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
The Present Continuous for future.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Ti me
* Presentation: 5’s - Ask Ss to write the correct - Individual  Vocabulary words on the faces. work
1. Write the correct words in the - Have Ss check their answers faces with a partner. Creative boring funny Confident hard-working kind clever talkative sporty Pre- shy patient serious teach - Explain that Haiku is a traditional form of Japanese
- Group-work 2. Make your own Haiku. poetry. Ask Ss to work in
Write a three line Haiku poem to 10’s groups of three to exchange describe yourself. their poems. 10’ s - Ask Ss to choose a member
- Group-work * Practice:  of group and write a short Grammar description of him/her. 3. Game: Who’s who? Demonstrate the activity with Example: the class, with Ss choral
reading Group & A’s roles.
A: He’s tall. He has glasses. He’s creative too. He isn’t shy. - Elicit the language being B: Is it Minh? 10’s
practiced in this activity. Ask A: Yes! / No, try again. Ss to complete the
conversations individually. As - Individual
4. Complete the dialogue. in !, Ss can share answers work Key: While-
with a partner, but they should A: are – doing teach record their original answers B: meeting – are going
to guide their self-assessment. A: am playing B: am watching School year: 2017-2018 44
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
* Production: 10’s - Divide Ss into pairs of As - Pair-work  Communication and Bs. Allow Ss to complete
5. Student A looks at the schedule the communication activity.
on this page. Student B looks at the Ask Pairs to join other pairs
schedule on the next page. Post- forming groups of 4. Example: teach - As and Bs can share what
A: What are you doing tomorrow? they leant about their
B: I’m playing football with my partners’ schedules before friends. discussing with the class. or I’m not doing anything.
*Homework: - Prepare next lesson School year: 2017-2018 45
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:8/10/2017
Date of teaching:6A:16/10/2017 6D17:/10 /2017 6E:14/10/2017 PERIOD 24: REVIEW 1 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can revise the language they have studied and the skills
they have practiced since Unit 1. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: revise the vocabulary they have learnt since Unit 1. 2. Structures:
The present simple and the present continuous tense.
There is / There isn’t - There are / There aren’t. Prepositions of place.
Verbs be and have for descriptions.
The Present Continuous for future.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’ Content Ti Activities me
* Presentation: 5’ - Ecilit the rules of - Individual  Pronunciation
pronouncing the final –s/-es work
1. Odd one out. Which underlined if needed.
part is pronounced differently in - Ask Ss to do the exercise each line? individually. Key: - Pair-work 1. D 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. B Pre- - Organize this as a game.
2. Write the name of the school teach Ask Ss to do this in pairs.
things and furniture in the house The pairs that find the most
which begin with /b/ and /p/. words will go to the board Key: and write the answers. /b/ /p/ Book, bag, Pen, pencil, bed… picture, poster… - Have Ss do this exercise - Individual  Vocabulary individually and then share work 3. Complete the words. 10
their answers with a partner. Key: - Check Ss’ answers.
1. English 2. homework 3.Lunch
4.Sports 5. badminton 6. Physics 7. lesson 8. Judo While- - Ask Ss to do in pairs. This - Whole teach can be done as a small class competition.
4. Do the crossword puzzle. Across: 1. wardrobe 3. Living room 5. apartment 6. Poster
Down: 2. Dining room 4. hall School year: 2017-2018 46
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
- Quickly check Ss’ answers. - Individual
5. Choose the correct words. 10 If time allows, ask Ss to work Key: ’ think of some other words
1. quite 2. Shy 3. Hard-working and make sentences. 4. patient 5. Sporty
* Practice:
- Elicit the use of the present  Grammar and the present continuous. - Individual
6. Complete the sentences with the Call one st do this exercise work
present simple or the present on the board. Other Ss also
continuous form of this verbs in do this. brackets. - Check Ss’ answers. Key: - Ask them for explanation. 1. is raining 2. do you have
3. am not going out ; am doing - Ask Ss to read the text 4. likes; is sleeping
carefully and pay attention to 5. is the hints. Ask Ss to do this 10 individually and compare - Individual
7. Complete the description with ’ their answers with a partner. work
the correct form of the verbs “be” - Check Ss’ answer and ask or “have”. them to explain the negative Key: forms in their answers.
1. is 2. isn’t 3. doesn’t have While- - At the same time, ask one
4. is 5. has 6. are 7. is 8. Is teach pair to go to the board and does this exercise. - Check Ss’ answers.
8. Read the sentences and draw
the furniture in the right place. - Ask Ss to do this in pair. After checking their answers, ask one or two - Pair-work  Everyday English pairs to act out the
9. Number the lines of the conversation.
dialogue in the correct order. Key:
6 – 1 – 7 – 2 – 3 – 5 – 8 – 4 - Ask Ss to do this exercise - Individual  Reading individually and check their work
1. Choose A, B or C for each answers with a partner blank in the e-mail. before giving their answers Key: to the T to confirm the 1. A 2. C 3. C 4. B 5. A 6. correct answers. B - Individual
2. Read the text and answer the work questions. Key: - Have Ss work in groups.
1. It’s in a quiet place not for from One interviews the other two the city center. School year: 2017-2018 47
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 what they like and dislike 2. They are hard-working and about the school and the serious. reason why.
3. They are helpful and friendly. - Summaries Ss’ ideas. 4. There are five clubs. - Play the recording once for
5. Because it’s a good school. Ss to listen. Play the recording again for Ss to - Group-  Speaking check their answers. work
3. Interview two classmates. Ask Announce the answer to Ss.
them what they like and dislike
about your school and the reasons - Ask Ss to quickly read the why.
questions. Ask Ss to listen to the recording again and - Individual  Listening answer the questions. work.
4. An and Mi are talking on the - Ask Ss to compare their
phone. Listen and circle the parts answers before giving T of the house you hear. their answers. Key: Kitchen garden living room bedroom - Individual
5. Listen again and answer the work questions. Key:
1. She’s watering the plants n the garden.
2. He’s listening to the radio. 3. He’s in Mi’s bedroom. 4. She’s watching TV.
* Production: 10 - Elicit the parts of an e- - Group-  WritingPost- mail. work
6. Write an e-mail to your friend. teach - Ask Ss to work in groups
Tell him/ her about a family to do this exercise. member. -
*Homework:
- Write the e-mail in your notebook. - Prepare for test 1. School year: 2017-2018 48
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:13/10/2017
Date of teaching:6A: 18/10/2017 6D: 19/10 /2017 6E:17/10/2017
Period 25: Written test 1
Aims: - Evaluating the students’ understanding about the learned vocabulary and structures
Objectives: - Students will be able to understand the requirement of the test and to do the test
correctly using the learned language items.
Materials: Copies of the written test needed for the whole class.
Time allowed: 45 minutes Procedure: MA TRẬN Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng CHỦ ĐỀ TN TL TN TL TN TL Tổng 8 8 I. Listening 2.0 2.0 4 8 4 6 22 II. Language Focus 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 5.5 4 2 6 III. Reading 1.0 0.5 1.5 4 4 IV. Writing 1.0 1.0 8 8 8 4 6 6 40 Tổng 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 10.0 20% 20% 20% 10% 15% 15% 100% School year: 2017-2018 49
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 *TEST (For class 6)
I. Listen to the text then fill one suitable word in the blank .(2 pts)
Hi, My name’s Susie Brewer. I’m (1)…………….…. years old. I’m now in grade (2)
………………at PLC Sydney. I (3)………….. it here, as I like to (4) ……………….in a
girls’ school. The (5)…………….. at my school are nice and very helpful, and my (6)
………………teacher is Mrs Susan McKeith. She teaches us maths. I have 3 hours to study (7)
………………..in the afternoon. Usually I do my homework at breaktime. We
(8)……………….our uniform everyday, but today we aren’t, as we’re going to have an outing to Taronga Zoo. II. Odd one out: (1pt) 9 - A. pens B. books C. maps D. students 10- A. open B. home C. come D. goes 11- A.book B. pen C. pencil D. toy 12- A. sofa B. bathroom C. table D. TV
III. Choose the best answer: (2pts)
13- Listen! Someone …………………at the door. A. is knocking B. knocking C. knock D. knocks
14- I usually ……………. my homework with my friends. A. play B. do C. am playing D. am doing
15- Hoang ……………… in a small house in the village. A. is living B. live C. are living D. lives
16- ………… is there in your room ? – There is a bed, a desk and a chair. A. What B. Who C. Which D. How
17- What is your favorite ……………….? – Maths. A. subject B. food C. drink D. toy
18- There ………… many beautiful flowers in this garden. A. is B. are C. do D. does
19- We …………………..English now.
A. are studying B. is studying C. study D. studies
20- ……… you get up at 6 o’clock everyday? A. Are B. Am C. Do D. Does
IV. Put the verbs in the correct form: (1pt)
21- The children (listen)…... …………… to music at the moment.
22- Hoa (play)……………. badminton every afternoon.
23- Please be quiet! My father (sleep)….. ……………….
24- I usually(visit)….………. my grandpa and grandma.
V. Fill : in / on / between: (1.5pts)
25- There is a pen ………………. the pencilcase.
26- The pictures are ……………... the wall.
27- There is a bed ……………….. the window and the wardrobe.
28- There are many books ……………. the bookshelf.
29- There is a sink and a shower …………….the bathroom.
30- The red book is ……………….. the green book and the yellow book.
VI. Read the text then do as requested (1.5pts)
a/ Choose the best answers to fill in the e-mail: (1pt) Hi Tom,
How (31)…………. you? Now I want to tell you about my bedroom. School year: 2017-2018 50
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
My room is small. But it is very beautiful. There (32)……….... a bed, a wardrobe, a table, a
chair and a lamp. I like music, so I put three posters of famous singers (33)………. the wall. I
usually (34)……….. my homework on the desk in front of the big window. My bedroom is my favourite room in the house.
What does your favourite room, Tom? Write to me soon. Best wishes, Vy 31- a. are b. is c. am d. do 32- a. are b. is c. do d. does 33- a. in b. on c. at d. behind 34- a. does b. am doing c. do d. are doing
b/ Answer the questions: (0.5pt)
35- Is Vy’s bedroom big or small?
………………………………………………………………………………….
36- Where does Vy usually do her homework?
………………………………………………………………………………….
VII. Complete each sentence so it means the same as the sentences above.(1pt)
37- I don’t have a bookshelf in my bedroom.
There ...............................................................................................
38- We have a sink, a fridge, a cooker and a cupboard in our kitchen.
There ...............................................................................................
39- The notebook is under the book.
The book ..........................................................................................
40- The dog is in front of the microwave.
The microwave ................................................................................ 10 Track 10.mp3 - THE END - School year: 2017-2018 51
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:14/10/2017
Date of teaching:6A,D: 21/10/2017 6E:19/10/2017
Period 26:UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Lesson 1: Getting Started I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can know the key language and structures to be learnt in this unit. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My neighborhood”.
2. Structures: Comparative adjectives.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’ Content Ti Activities me
* Presentation: 5’ Write the Unit title on the - Whole Guess what the picture might board “Lost in the old class show or what the conversation town!”. Explain the meaning might be about. of “surprise”. Ex: Pre-teach - Ask Ss to guess what the - Where are Nick, Khang and picture might show or what Phong? the conversation might be - What might be happening to about. them? What are they doing? - Ask Ss questions about the picture.
* Practice: - Play the recording (twice) - Listen
1. Listen and read 10’ - Ask Ss to read the and read
a. Read and put the action in conversation and check their - order. answers. Confirm the correct Individual Key: answers. work
2 – 5 – 3 – 4 – 1 – 6 - Ask Ss to read and put the b. Making suggestions. action in order. Key:
- Tell Ss to refer back to the
1. a. Where shall we go first? While-teach conversation to find the
b. Let’s go to “Chua Cau”. phrases. Practice saying
2. a. Shall we go there first? them together. b. Ok, sure. 3. a. Shall we go by bicycle? b. No, let’s walk there.
2. Work in pairs. Role-play - First, model the role-play
making suggestions. with a more able St. Then - Pair- School year: 2017-2018 52
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 ask pairs to role-play the work short conversations before demonstrating for the class.
3. Match the places below with 10’ - Have Ss quickly match
the pictures. Then listen, each place (in the picture)
check and repeat the words. with its name. Then play it - Pair- Key: again , pausing after each work 1. E 2. H 3. F 4. C 5. G item and asking them to 6. A 7. B 8. D repeat chorally and individually. Correct their pronunciation.
4. Think about where you live. 10’
Work in pairs. Ask and - First, model this activity
answer questions about it. with a more able St. Ask Ss Example: to work in pairs . Call some A: Is there a theatre in your pairs to practice in front of - Pair- neighborhood? the class. work B: Yes, there is. / No, there isn’t.
5. Match the instructions in
the box with the pictures. - Have Ss quickly match Key:
instruction with the diagram. 1. Go straight on.
Check their answers. If Ss do
2. Turn left at the traffic lights.
not understand the sentences, 3. Go past the bus stop. use the diagrams to work the -
4. Take the first turning on the meaning out from the Individual left. context. work 5. Go to the end of the road. 6. Go along the street. 7. Cross the street.
* Production: 10’
- Ask Ss to give their partner - Pair- 6. Game the directions to one of the work Example: places on the map, and they A: Go straight. Take the Post-teach try to guess. Then swap.
second turning on the left. It’s on your right.
B: Is that the art gallery? A: Yes, it is./ No, try again.
*Homework:
- Practice giving directions to your house. - Prepare the next lesson School year: 2017-2018 53
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:15/10/2017
Date of teaching:6A: 23/10/2017 6D: 24/10 /2017 6E:21/10/2017
Period 27:UNIT 4: MY NEIGHTBOURHOOD
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can pronounce correctly the sounds /i:/ and /i/ in isolation
and in context; use vocabulary related to the topic “My neighborhood”. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the vocabulary related to the topic “My neighborhood”. 2. Structures: Comparative adjectives.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, flash cards. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’ Content Ti Activities me
* Presentation: 5’
- Practice saying the adjectives - Whole  Vocabulary with Ss. Use some examples to class
1. Fill in each blank with one work the meaning out of the
word from the box. Listen,
context. With difficult adjectives
check and repeat the words.
T may translate them or ask Ss to
translate. Then ask Ss to write the
correct adjectives in the blanks. Pre-teach
Play the recording as many times
as required to allow Ss to check
their answers and support their pronunciation.
* Practice: 10’ - Explain that some words go -
2. Now match the adjective s together, but some don’t.
Individual from the box in 1 with their - Write the adjectives on the work opposites below. board and allow Ss to attach Key: vocabulary cards to make - boring – exciting While- matches. - historic – modern teach - Ask Ss to complete the word - noisy – quiet/ peaceful webs in their books. - convenient – inconvenient - fantastic – terrible - Play the recording.
- Ask Ss to listen and repeat the
3. Work in pairs. Ask and words. - Pair-
answer questions about your School year: 2017-2018 54
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 work
neighborhood. Use the words
- Have Ss practice reading the
in 1 and 2 to help you. words first. Example:
- Play the recording for Ss to A: Is our neighborhood listen and do the task. - Whole polluted?
- Ask Ss to listen while T play the class B: No, it isn’t. recording. A: Is it peaceful?
- Ask Ss to chant along. Provide - Group- B: Yes, it is.
further practice by dividing the work 
Pronunciation /i:/ and /i/ 0’
1 class into 2 groups. Have groups
4. Listen and repeat the words. sing alternate lines.
Pay attention the sound /i:/ and
- Stick some pictures of people /i/ from magazines on the board. - T whole Key:
Call out a description, and have class /i:/ /i/
Ss touch the appropriate picture Cheap, sleep, Historic, while repeating the sentence. peaceful, exciting,
Next, point to pictures and form convenient, expensive,
sentences. Point out that do or police. noisy, friendly.
does is added to the start of - 0’
questions and the end of answers. Individual
5. Listen to the sentences and 1 - Ask Ss to do this exercise work
circle the words you hear.
individually first then compare Key: their answers with a partner. 1. Living - Check Ss’ answers. 2. Heat 3. Seats 4. Sheep 5. Tins 6. Mill 7. Teams 8. * C Prh o ip d uction: 10’
- Ask Ss to listen while T plays - Group-
6. Listen and practice the
the recording. Play the recording work
chant. Notice the sounds /i:/
again and ask Ss to chant along. and /i/. Post-teach Provide further practice by dividing the class into two MY NEIGHBOURHOOD groups. Have groups sing (page 40) alternate lines.
*Homework: - Learn vocabulary by heart. - Prepare the next lesson School year: 2017-2018 55
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:20/10/2017
Date of teaching:6A: 25/10/2017 6D: 26/10 /2017 6E:24/10/2017
Period 28:UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use adjectives to compare things. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My neighbourhood”. 2. Structures: Comparative adjectives.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’ Content Ti Activities me
* Presentation: 5’ Grammar - Choose 2 Ss of very - Whole Comparative Adjectives different height and ask them class - Who is taller? to stand up. Ask the class a question. - Example: - Focus Ss’ attention on
This ruler/ desk is long. But that comparative forms by giving ruler/ desk is longer. examples. Pre- - Explain that comparative teach adjectives are constructed in several different ways in English and that some of those ways are presented in the box. Explain the simplest ways to identify the number of syllables in an English word and give further example or practice if necessary.
* Practice: 10’ - Ask Ss to read the - Pair -
1. Complete the following sentences instructions. Tell Ss what work
with the comparative form of the they should do.
adjectives in brackets. - Have Ss compare their Key: answers in pairs before 2. taller 3. Bigger While- checking with the whole 4. noisier 5. cheaper teach class. - Use Ss use the example to Individual
2. Now complete the following show what Ss should do. Ask work
sentences with the comparative form them to pay attention to the
of the adjectives in brackets. syllables in each adjective Key: and look back at the 2. more beautiful
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 grammar box if necessary. 3. more convenient 4. more interesting 5. more expensive. - Ask Ss to read and 10’ complete the sentences Individual
3. Read and complete Vy’s letter to individually. Remind them to work her friend. pay attention to the number Key: of the syllables in each 1. Drier 2. Smaller 3. Older adjectives. 4. Wider 5. more delicious 6. Older 6. Cheaper - Elicit the contrast between the things in the two
4. Look at the pictures of Yen Binh neighborhoods and the Individual
neighbourhood and Long son
adjectives that can be used to work
neighbourhood. Now write about the describe them. differences. 10’ - Correct. - Tell Ss how to form a
5. Complete the following sentences question and pay attention to
with the comparative form of the the number of the syllables
adjectives in brackets. in each adjectives. Key: - Check their answers. 2. More expensive - Model with a St. Ask Ss to 3. More comfortable work in pairs. Call some 4. More historic pairs to practice in front of 5. Narrower the class.
6. Work in pair. Ask and answer questions. - Ask Ss to think ot the
* Production: places they’ve been to.
- Pair -work 7. Work in pairs. Ask and answer Model with a more able Ss
questions about the places that you and then have them work in
know. Use the comparative form of pairs while T goes around
the adjectives in the box. Post- the class and monitors. Example:
teach - Ask a few pairs with the
A: Is Hue busier than Da Nang? most imaginative ideas to B: No, it isn’t. report them to the class.
*Homework: - Write 3 sentences using comparative adjectives. - Prepare the next lesson
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:21/10/2017
Date of teaching:6A: 26/10/2017 6D: 25/10 /2017 6E:26/10/2017
PERIOD 29 : CHECK THE TEST1
I. Aims: - Helping students to recognize the mistakes made in the written test. II. Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to recognize the mistakes in their test.
III. Materials: Test papers which have been marked. IV. Procedure: T’s activities Ss’ activities Content I) Warm up: - Sing a song - Greeting.
to warm up the I.CHECK THE TEST1
- Get the class to sing a song. class. I. 2.0 points ( 0.5 each) II) New lesson: 1- eleven 2- six - Give general comments. - Listen. 3-like 4-study
- Give the test papers back to ss - Receive the test papers 5-teachers 6-favorite/favourit 7-vietnamese 8-wear - Give comments in details. - Pay attention II. Odd one out: (1pt) ( 0.25 each) 9- D , 10- B , 11- D , 12- B - - Listen
III. Choose the best answer: (2pts) ( 0.25 each) 13- A, 14- B , 15- D , 16-A - 17-A , 18-B , 19-A , 20-C
IV. Put the verbs in the correct form: (1pt) ( 0.25 each) 21- are listening 22- plays 23-is sleeping 24-visit
- Praise the excellent students and encourage the not- good- yet
V. Write : in / on / between: (1.5pts) ones. ( 0.25 each) 25. in 26. On 27. between 28.on 29.in 30.between
VI. Read the text then do as requested (1.5pts)
a/ Choose the best answers to fill in
the e-mail: (1pt)
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 ( 0.25 each) 31-a 32-b 33-b 34-c
b/ Answer the questions: (0.5pt) ( 0.25 each)
35. It’s small. (Vy’s bedroom is small).
36. She usually does her homework on the
desk in front of the big window.
VII. Complete each sentence so it
means the same as the sentences above.(1pt) (0.5 each)
37. There isn’t a bookshelf in my bedroom.
38. There is a sink,a fridge,a cooker ,and a cupboard in our kitchen.
39.The book is on the notebook.
40.The microware is behind the dog .
III) Consolidation: - Listen to the - Commment in conclusions. conclusions to make sure to do well next
IV.Homework: time. - Prepare the next lesson
IV.Homework: - Prepare the next lesson :
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:28 /10/2017
Date of teaching:6A: 26/11/2017 6D: 25/11 /2017 6E:31/10/2017
Period 30 :UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Lesson 4: Communication I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can talk about different places and show directions to these in a neighborhood. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My friends”. 2. Structures: Comparative adjectives.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Ti me
* Presentation: 5’ - Have Ss look at extra
- Whole class Extra vocabulary: vocabulary. o First o Then o After that Pre- o Finally teach - Ask Ss if they know about - What do you know about Hoi Hoi An. Allow 20 – 30 An? seconds for Ss to think. - Anything you can remember - Have Ss brainstorm about about it. Hoi AN.
* Practice: - Playing the recording. Ask
- Whole class 1. Nick is listening to an audio 15’ Ss to listen only. Then play
guide to Hoi An. Listen and fill in
the recording again and allow the gaps.
Ss to fill in the gaps as they listen. Key: - Ask Ss to share their 1. Historic answers in pairs, before 2. Convenient While- playing the recording a final 3. Straight teach time to allow the pairs to - Individual 4. Second check their answers. work 5. Left - Ask Ss to read the audio 6. Right
guide again, paying attention 7. Second to the use of the connective 8. Next to works. - Individual work
2. Choose one of the cities below.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 - Ask Ss to read the brief
Create an audio guide for your 15’ information about London city. and Ho Chi Minh city and look carefully at the two Remember to: simplified maps of the two
- include some comparisons with cities. other cities. - Remind Ss of the
- give directions to different expressions they can use to places.
give directions; have Ss refer - Pair-work to the expressions in the dialogue and 5 of getting started.
- Haves Ss prepare their audio guide individually and then share it with a partner. - Have Ss practice presenting their audio guide in pairs.
* Production:
- Call some Ss to present their - Whole class 3. Present your guide to your 10’ audio guide to the whole class. class. - After each St has finished Post- his/ her audio guide, ask for teach some comments from the
*Homework: other Ss.
- Write your audio guide in your - Make comments and any notebook. mistakes if there are any. - Prepare the next lesson
6A,D:Bù CT tiết 29,30
Date of planning:27/10/2017
Date of teaching:6A: 30/10/2017
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 6D: 31/10 /2017 6E:02/11/2017
Period 31 :UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD Lesson 5: Skills 1 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use read for specific and general information about
good things and bad things in a neighborhood. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My neighborhood”. 2. Structures: Comparative adjectives.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Ti me
* Presentation:
- Ask Ss to look at the picture
- Whole class Questions: 5’
of Khang’s neighborhood. And
1. Where do you think Khang’s ask them some questions. neighborhood is? Pre-
2. What do you think about it? teach 3. Do you like living there? Why? Why not?
* Practice: Reading
- Ask Ss to scan the passage to - Individual
1. Find these words in Khang’s 10’ find where the words suburbs, work
blog. What do they mean?
backyard… are in the passage. - Ask Ss to note where they
2. Read Khang’s blog. Then
found the information that help answer the questions. them to answer the questions. Key: - Have ss compare their - Pair - work 1. It is in the suburbs of Da answers in pairs. Nang City. 2. Because it has beautiful While- parks and sandy beaches and teach fine weather. 3. They are very friendly. 4. Because there’re many modern buildings and offices in the city. - Ask Ss to scan the passage - Individual
again and find the information work
3. Read Khang’s blog again to complete the table.
and fill in the table with the information. - Ask Ss to note where they Key: 10’
found the information that help Like:
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 them to answer the questions.
- Pair – work - It’s great for outdoor - Have ss compare their activities. answers in pairs. - There’s almost everything here - The food is very good. - People are incredibly - Remind Ss of expressions friendly.
they can use to give directions. Dislike: - Model this activity with a
- Pair – work - the street are busy, crowded, more able St and then have Ss and noisy during the day. work in pairs.
- Call some pairs to talk before  Speaking the whole class, then invite
4. In pairs, ask and answer some comments from other Ss.
questions about how to get to the places on the map. 10’ Example: (page 44)
* Production: - Note some common errors
5. Work in pairs. Ask and 10’ and discuss them with the - Pair -work
answer the question about the whole class.
way to get to the places in your
- select some pairs to act out
town, village/ near your Post-
their dialogue in front of the school. teach class. - give feedback - Give comments on strengths
and correct a few errors in the target language.
*Homework: - Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning:28/10/2017
Date of teaching:6A: 01/11/2017 6D: 02/11 /2017 6E:04/11/2017
Period 32:UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 Lesson 6: Skills 2 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can listen to get the information about directions to some
places in a neighbourhood and write about what they like or dislike about their neighbourhood. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My neighborhood”. 2. Structures: Comparative adjectives. Modal verb: must
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Ti me
* Presentation: 5’
- Ask Ss to read Study Skills – - T whole  Listening
Listening carefully. Then apply class Study Skills – Listening these tips to doing Listening exercises.
- Play the recording and ask Ss
1. Listen to the conversation Pre- to write down the words or
between a strager and Duy’s teach phrases in the blanks.
Dad. Fill in the blanks with the
- Play the recording again for Ss words you hear. to check the answers. Key: 1. The end 2. Right 3. Lower secondary school 4. Le Duan street
* Practice: 10’
- Ask Ss to read the rubric and - Pair-work
2. Listen the conversation study the map carefully. Ask
again. Choose the correct
them to work in pairs to discuss
places from the list below. how to get to the places
Write the correct letters A-F on numbered 1 – 4. the map.
- Play the recording and have Ss Key: choose the correct answers as 1. A they listen. 2. C While-
- Call on some Ss to write their 3. F teach answers to the board. 4. D
- Play the recording again for Ss
to check their answers. Pause at 10’
the sentences that include the  Writing information Ss need for their
3. Tick () what you like or answers. don’t like about a neighbourhood.
-Ask Ss to tick what they like • Sandy beaches and don’t like about their • Heavy traffic
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 neighbourhood. Ask them to
• Many modern buildings and count how many things they offices have in common with their • Peaceful street partners. - Individual
• Good restaurants and cafes work • Sunny weather • Busy and crowded streets • Many shops, and markets
- Ask Ss to make notes on what 10’
4. Make notes about your
they like and dislike about their
neighbourhood. Think about neighbourhood.
the things you like/ dislike
- Ask them to share their notes about it. with their partners. LIKE DISLIKE
- Read out the notes from some
more able Ss to the whole class. - Individual work -Pair-work
* Production: 10 - Ask Ss to refer back to the - Individual
5. Write a paragraph about
reading for useful language and work
your neighbourhood saying ideas, and write some useful
what you like or dislike about Post-
expressions and language on the living there. Use the teach board.
information in 4, and Khang’s - Ask them to write the first blog as a model.
draft. Then have them write their final version.
*Homework:
- Write your paragraph in your book. - Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning:29/10/2017
Date of teaching:6A,D: 04/11/2017 6E:07/11/2017
Period 33:UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD Lesson 7: Looking Back
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can review all what they have learnt in this unit. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “My neighborhood”. 2. Structures: Comparative adjectives.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’ Content Ti Activities me
* Presentation: 5’ Vocabulary - Ask Ss to write the - Individual
1. Write the correct word for each words in their notebook work picture. individually and then - Pair-work Key:
check with their partners. 1. statue 2. Railway station
Correct the mistakes. Let 3. park 4. temple Ss repeat the words. 5. memorial 6. cathedral Pre- Check their teach pronunciation. - Individual
2. Fill in each gap with a suitable work adjective. - Ask Ss to read the Key: sentences carefully and 1. noisy 2. narrow complete them with the
3. historic 4. inconvenient 5. adjectives they have cheaper/ more expensive learnt in Unit 4. - Ask Ss to work Individual
* Practice: 10’ individually to put the work  Grammar following adjectives in
3. Put the following adjectives in the correct column. the correct column. - Check and confirm the Key: While- correct answers. One syllable teach Fast, hot, large Two syllables Happy, noisy, quite, heavy
Three or more syllables Exciting, expensive, convenient, difficult, polluted
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 - Ask Ss to match the - Individual
4. Match the name of a nature 10’ name of a nature wonder work
wonder in column A with a word in column A with a word in column B. in column B. - Pair-work Key: - Ask Ss to check their Faster Happier answers with a partner More convenient Hotter before discussing their Noisier More polluted answers as a class. More difficult More exciting Heavier Larger More expensive Quieter While- teach
5. Complete the sentences - Ask Ss to complete the
comparing the pictures. Use 10’ sentences comparing the
- Pair-work comparative form of the adjectives pictures. Use comparative below. form of the adjectives Key: given. 1. Noisier than 2. More modern than 3. More convenient than 4. More beautiful than 5. More expensive than - Ask Ss to read the
* Production: 10’ questions and answers - Individual  Communication twice. Then match them. work
6. Match the questions with the - Have them write all correct answers. Post- sentences in their Key: teach notebooks. a – c d – e f – g h – b - Ask Ss to role-play the
7. Role-play the questions and questions and answers - Pair-work answers.
*Homework: - Do “project”. - Prepare next lesson
Date of planning:3/11/2017
Date of teaching:6A: 06/11/2017 6D: 07/11 /2017
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 6E: 0 /11/2017 Period 34: RIVISION UNIT 3+UNIT4 I. The aims:
Review is to revise the language Ss have studied and the skills they have practiced since Unit3. II. Language Focus: -Vocabulary:
The lexical items related to the topic “My friends” and the topic “My neighborhood”. - Structures:
+Verbs be and have for descriptions.
+The Present continuous for future. +Comparative adjectives.
III. Teaching ads: Lesson plan, chalk , …. V. Procedures: T’activities Ss’activities content I. RIVISION:Unit 3:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical
items related to the topic “My friends”. 2. Structures:
I.ĐỘNG TỪ “HAVE”: CÓ (have/ has) +Verb have and be for Listen and
(+) I/ You/ We/ They/DTsố nhiều + have+ N. descriptions. copy
He/ She /It/ DT số ít + has+ N.
(-)I/ You/ We/ They/ DTsố nh + don’t have+ N.
He/ She/ It/ DT số ít + doesn’t have+ N.
(?) Do+I/ you/ we/ they/ DT số n + have+ N?
Does + he/ she/ it/ danh từ số ít + have+ N? Yes, S+ do/does.
No, S + don’t/doesn’t. EX1: I have a new pen.
I don’t have a new pen. Do you have a new pen? Yes, I do..
EX2: She has a new pen. Listen and
She doesn’t have a new pen. copy
Does she have a new pen? Yes, she does. LƯU Ý:
-Khi mô tả về khuôn mặt, tóc, mũi….ta dùng have/ has
-Khi mô tả tính cách, chiều cao……..ta dùng: To be ( am/ is/ are) EX: He is tall. He is friendly.
He has a round face. He has short hair.
II.THÌ HIỆN TẠI TIẾP DIỄN: (diễn tả 1 kế hoạch trong tương lai) +The Present continuous for S + am/is/are + V-ing future.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
-Thường dùng kèm với: tonight/ this evening (tối
nay)/ tomorrow (ngày mai)
EX: I’m not coming tonight. I’m busy.
This evening, they are watching a film. II. RIVISION:Unit 4:
Tomorrow, I’m playing football with my team. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical
items related to the topic “My neighborhood”.
III.COMPARATIVE ADJECTIVES: (Tính từ so sánh) 2. Structures:
a.Đối với tính từ ngắn: (Short adj) Comparative adjectives.
- Là những tính từ khi phát âm chỉ có 1 âm tiết:
short →shorter, tall →taller, big → bigger….
S1 + be + tính từ ngắn + “er” + than + S2
Ex : I am taller than she is (hoặc her).
My father is bigger than your father.
b.Đối với tính từ dài:(Long adj)
- Là những tính từ khi phát âm có từ 2 âm tiết trở
lên: careful → more careful, beautiful → more Do exercises beautiful… - ……….
S1 + be + MORE + tính từ dài + than + S2
Ex: My mother is more beautiful than her mother.
This book is more exciting than that book.
L ưu ý:
a. Khi tính từ có 2 âm tiết mà tận cùng là:
Y, OW, ET, ER thì được xem là tín h từ ngắn Ex: happy → happier Narrow → narrower Quiet → quieter Clever → cleverer
Gentle → gentler → the gentlest
b. Nếu tính từ tận cùng là “Y”, trước nó là 1
phụ âm thì đổi “Y”→ I rồi thêm ER
Ex: lovely → lovelier
c. Nếu tính từ ngắn tận cùng là E, ta chỉ thêm R Ex: nice → nicer
d. Nếu tính từ ngắn tận cùng là 1 phụ âm, trước
nó là 1 nguyên âm thì ta gấp đôi phụ âm cuối
rồi thêm ER (ngoại trừ tính từ tận cùng là: W). Ex: thin → thinner Fat → fatter
hưng : Slow → slower
e. Các tính từ tận cùng là: -ed, -ful, -ing, -ish, -
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
ous….. là những tính từ dài.
Ex: more bored, more useful, more boring, more
selfish, more continuous………..
NGOẠI L Ệ: a. Good / well → better b. Bad / badly →worse c. Much / many → more d. Little → less e. Far →farther / further -Do exercises :
Ex1:Fill each blank with a suitable word from the box. 4. Homework.
untidy are not near next on his bag -Do exercises in workbook
An's bedroom is big but messy. There ...(1)...
clothes on the floor. There is a big desk ...(2)... the
window, there are dirty bowls and chopsticks
...(3)... it. He usually puts his school ...(4)... under
the desk. His bed is ...(5)... to the desk, and it is
also ...(6).... There is a cap, some CDs and some
books on the bed. An's Mum is ...(7)... happy with
this, and how An is tidying up ...(8)... room.
Date of planning:4/11/2017
Date of teaching: 6A: 08/11/2017 6D: 09/11 /2017 6E:09/11/2017
Period 35: UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Lesson 1: Getting Started
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can know the key language and structures to be learnt in this unit. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “things in nature” and “travel item”. 2. Structures:
Superlatives if short adjectives. Modal verb: must
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, picture. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Tim e
* Presentation: 5’ - Show some pictures of - Whole class Describe the pictures. nature wonders. Ex: Pre- - Ask Ss questions about the - What can you see in this teach picture. picture? - Ask Ss to share any recent - Where is it? experiences of going on a - Do you know this place? picnic.
* Practice:
1. Listen and read 10’ */ New words. - desert | dɪˈzɜːt |
- waterfall | ˈwɔːtəfɔːl | - valley | ˈvæli | - Ask Ss to work - island | ˈaɪlənd | individually. Allow them to
a. Answer the following share answers before - Individual questions. discussing in groups or as a work Key: class. 1. Vy is 2. She went to wrong room. 3. Uluru
While- - Tell Ss to refer back to the 4. Australia. teach conversation to find the 5. An island.
phrases. Ask Ss to write the
b. Put the words in the correct sentences. Ensure they add order. - Group-work appropriate punctuation. Key: - Practice saying the phrase
1. Can you spell that, please? together.
2. Can you repeat that, please? - Use the example to 3. Can I come in? practice a conversation with Ss. Then ask Ss to develop a
c. Brainstorm situations when role-play around their ideas.
people use these sentences. - Pair-work Support with suggestions.
Then role-play the situations More able Ss can try to with a partner. extend the conversation. Example:
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 - Ask pairs to perform for A: Hi, Can I order a cheese the class. and meat pizza, please? B: Sure. What’s your name, please? A: It’s Nick.
B: Can you spell that, please? A: Yes, it’s N-I-C-K.
2. Listen and repeat the 10’
following words. - Play the recording. Ask Ss - Individual  to listen and repeat the work 1. mountain 2. River words. 3. waterfall 4. Forest 5. cave 6. Desert 7. lake 8. Beach 9. island 10. valley
- Ask Ss to label the pictures
3. Now label the pictures. - Pair -work with the correct words. Ss Key: 10’ can work in pairs. 1. mountain 2. river - Show picture cards of the 3. waterfall 4. forest vocabulary. Elicit Ss’ 5. cave 6. desert answers. Then provide the 7. lake 8. beach correct words. 9. island 10. valley
* Production: 10’ - Ask Ss to look back the - Group-work
4. Read the conversation in 1 Post- conversation in Getting
again. Tick the words you can teach Started and try to find the find. vocabulary used.
*Homework: - Learn Vocabulary. - Practice the conversation. - Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning:4/11/2017
Date of teaching: 6A,D,E: 11/11/2017
Period 36: UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1 I. Objectives:
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
By the end of this lesson, students can pronounce correctly the sounds /t/ and /st/ in isolation
and in context; use vocabulary related to “travel item”. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “things in nature” and “travel item”. 2. Structures:
Superlatives if short adjectives. Modal verb: must
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, flash cards. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Ti me
* Presentation: 5’
I.Vocabulary:Travel items - Ask Ss to match the words - Individual
1. Match the words with the they know. work
pictures then practice saying the - Practice saying the - Whole class following items. Pre- vocabulary with Ss. Ask Ss to Key: teach touch the correct pictures as 1. painkillers 2. Scissors they say the word. 3. plaster 4. Sun cream Alternatively, create a mime 5. sleeping bag for each word with Ss. 6. Walking boots. 7. Backpack 8. compass.
* Practice: 10’ - Read and act out the - Individual
2. Complete the following sentences. work sentences.
- Elicit ideas for sentence 1. Key:
Then allow Ss to complete the 1. Compass 2. Sun cream remaining sentences. 3. Painkillers 4. Backpack
- Check their ideas at the end. 5. Plaster. - Remind Ss that in the
3. Now put the items in orders. 10’ introduction they thought - Pair-work
Number 1 is most useful on
about useful things for beach,
holiday. Number 8 is the least desert, and mountain. Tell Ss useful.
While- they are going to a beach teach
holiday and they need to order the items form very useful to not very useful.
- allow Ss to work in pairs to form their list. - Ask pairs to join other
groups and compare their lists. Encourage more able Ss to
give reasons for their choices.
II.Pronunciation: Sounds: - Play the recording. - Individual 10’ /t/ and /st/ - Ask Ss to listen and number work
4. Listen and number the words
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 the words in the order they you hear. hear them. - Allow Ss to compare their answers.
Best boat coast lost boot
desert plaster forest - Play the recording the second time. Discuss the
5. Listen again and repeat the answers as a class. - Whole class words. - Play the recording again. Pause after each word and ask Ss to repeat.
* Production: 10’ - Play the recording of the
- Group-work 6. Listen and repeat. Pay sentences. Ask Ss to listen
attention to the bold-typed parts
carefully and raise their hands of the words.
when they hear the /t/ or /st/ sounds. - Alternatively, divide the
class into a /t/ group and a /st/ Post- group and they listen and teach respond to their own sound. - Play the recording again. Pause after each sentence and ask Ss to repeat.
*Homework: - Learn vocabulary by heart. - Prepare the next lesson.
Date of planning:4/11/2017
Date of teaching: 6A: 13/11/2017 6D,E: 14/11 /2017
Period 37:UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2 I. Objectives:
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
By the end of this lesson, students can use comparative and superlative adjectives to describe things in nature. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “things in nature” and “travel item”. 2. Structures:
Superlatives of short adjectives. Modal verb: must
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Ti me
* Warm-up: 5’ Pre-
- Show some pictures about some -Whole Where is it? teach places in the world. class (Ss’ answer)
* Presentation: 10’ I. Grammar
- Choose more able Ss to act as Vy, - Individual *.Comparative and
and read the sentences to the class. work superlative adjectives
- Ask Ss to stick T or F in the box 1. Vy is giving a quiz provided. about wonders of the While-
world. Read the sentences teach
and guess if they are true or false. Key:
- Play the recording and allow Ss to 1. T 2. T 3. F check their answers. - Individual 4. T 5. T 6. T work
- Ask Ss to look back at Vy’s - Individual
II.Practice: 10’
sentences, find and underline all the work
3. Underline all the words examples of –est.
ending in -est in the quiz. (Watch out)
- Ask Ss to complete the table - Individual
4. Complete the table with
individually. Dis cuss their answers work the comparatives and at the end superlatives.
- Ask Ss to complete the passage
with the correct words. Pairs can
5. Now Vy is taking about While-
practice role-playing the completed other amazing places. teach passage. Complete the passage. Key: 1. hottest 2. hotter 3. coldest 4. coldest 5. colder 6. biggest 7. highest 8. smaller 10’ - Prepare the slips of paper
- Group work 6. Cut up some pieces of beforehand for the groups.
paper. Write the names of
Alternatively dictate the names of some famous places on
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
the places and allow Ss to write
them. Work in group and them on blank slips.
make sentences about the places.
- Ask Ss to read Vy’s note and find - Individual
7. Vy is giving Mai some
the uses of “must”. Refer Ss back work feedback. Read and
to the grammar table if necessary. underline the forms of
Discuss the uses of “must”. must.
III. Production: 10’
- Ask Ss to complete the sentences. - Pair - work
8. Look at the classroom
Ss can share their ideas in pairs.
rules below. Write some
Discuss answers as a class. As an more rules for you and extension, Ss can act out the your classmate.
sentences, one acting as a teacher, Post- one acting as a student. Example: teach 1. We must arrive on time. 2. We mustn’t pick flowers in the school garden. …
*Homework:
- Practice more by using the comparatives and superlatives. - Prepare next lesson
Date of planning:4/11/2017
Date of teaching: 6A: 15/11/2017 6D,E: 16/11 /2017
Period 38:UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD
Lesson 4: Communication I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use must and mustn’t to give orders and talk about and give travel advices.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “things in nature” and “travel item”. 2. Structures:
Superlatives if short adjectives. Modal verb: must
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Time *Extra vocabulary: 5’
* Presentation: - Whole class +Tent(n): - Have Ss look at extra +Torch(n): vocabulary. +Sun hat(n): Pre-teach +Waterproof coat(n): +Map(n): +Mobile phone(n):
* Practice:
1. Read the travel guide 10’
- Whole class entry. - Show the picture of Mount
- Must we take a torch to Everest. Mount Everest?
- Ask Ss to look at the picture - What is a mountain of Mount Everest and show range? picture of extra vocabulary. - What do you think
Ask Ss to decide whether the diverse mean?
objects are useful for going to - Have you had any
Mount Everest, e.g. Must we unforgettable take a torch to Mount experiences? Everest? - Ask Ss to read quickly and check their ideas.
- Ask Ss to read the text again While- and ask some follow-up - Individual teach questions. work
- Ask Ss to use information in 10’
the text and their own ideas to
- Pair-work 2. Now make a list of the fill the must and mustn’t
things you must take to columns.
the Himalayas. Then add
things you mustn’t take. - Create your own list and 10’ demonstrate the activity with a more able St.
3. Role-play being a tour - Swap roles. Then ask the
guide and a tourist. Tell class to complete the role- your partner what to play. prepare for their trip to Himalayas. Try to give reasons.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
* Production: 10’ - Ask the class to complete
- Whole class 4. Perform your role-play Post-teach the role-play. Ask pairs to for the class. demonstrate for the class.
*Homework:
- Write 4 sentences with must and mustn’t. - Prepare the next lesson.
Date of planning:4/11/2017
Date of teaching: 6A: 22/11/2017 6D,E:21/11/2017
Period 39:UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson 5: Skills 1 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can use read a brochure for tourist information and talk about and give travel advice. II. Language Focus:
1. 1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “things in nature” and “travel item”. 2. Structures:
Superlatives if short adjectives. Modal verb: must
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Time
* Presentation: Introduction 5’ - Whole class (Ss’ answers) - Ask Ss to compare the text Pre- in Communication and Skill teach 1. Encourage them to think of the purposes of the texts and where they might see them. 10’
* Practice: I.Reading - Individual
1. Before you read, look - Ask Ss to read the text work
at the pictures below and quickly to answer the make predictions about questions and check their
the text. Then read and ideas from the introduction. check your ideas.
- Discuss the Study Skill with - Where is the passage Ss. from? - What is it about? - What do you know about the subjects? 10’ - Ask Ss to find the four - Individual 2. Find these words in words in the passage and work the passage in 1, then underline them, then check check their meaning. their meaning.
- Ask Ss to read the sentences then write True or False. While- Refer them back to the text teach for the answers. - Ask Ss to read the passage - Individual 3. Read the following again and answer the work
sentences. Then tick true 10’ questions. or false. Key: 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T - Discuss with Ss which - Pair – work 4. Make your own things they find interesting English camp schedule. about Ha Long Bay and Hue. Key: Brainstorm ideas on the 1. Ha Long Bay is in board. Quang Ninh Province. 2. You must take a boat ride. 3. A visit to the Imperial City more important.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 4. Because people travel there just for the food. II.Speaking - Ask Ss to close the books. - Group -work
5. Make notes about one Ask Ss to tell their partner of the places in the about the place. brochure. Use the information in the text and your own ideas. 6. Tell your partner about the place. Ha Long Bay and Hue
* Production: Show a picture of your town. - Pair -work 7. Your friends are
Tell the class they are visiting
visiting your town. Think
it. Review interesting features about what they must of your town with Ss. Then and mustn’t do while ask Ss to suggest some
they are here. Role-play Post- advice. the conversation in teach groups. Things they must do/bring: … Things they mustn’t do/bring: …
*Homework: - Prepare the next lesson.
Date of planning:4/11/2017
Date of teaching: 6A:25/11/2017 6D,E: 23/11 /2017
Period 40:UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson 6: Skills 2 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can listen to get the information about travel plans and
write a travel guide entry about an interesting place. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “things in nature” and “travel item”. 2. Structures:
Superlatives if short adjectives. Modal verb: must
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player IV. Procedures:
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Time
* Presentation: 5’
- Ask Ss to recall the 2 places in
- Whole class I. Listening
the brochure in skill 1. Ask Ss
1. Nick’s family are in the which one they think Nick’s
travel agent’s. they want Pre-
family will choose as their holiday
to go on vacation. They teach
destination. Ask Ss to explain
are choosing a place from their choices. the brochure above. - Play the recording for the Which place do they answer. choose?
* Practice: 15’
- Read through the questions with - Individual 2. Listen again and Ss and support with any work answer the following
difficulties before they attempt to questions.
answer. Play the recording again. Key: - Correct. 5. Ha Long Bay, Hue, Mui Ne or Nha Trang.
6. Can we see a picture of the hotel in Mui Ne?
7. Mui Ne is cheaper but I think Ha Long Bay is While- more interesting. teach
- Choose Ss to show their places 8. Yes, he is.
to the class. Ask some questions Individual II. Writing 15’ to prepare the class for the work
3. Write a travel guide activity. about a place you know. Questions: - What nature wonders are there? - What things can do there?
- What thngs we must do?
* Production: 10’
- Ask Ss to make notes about their - Individual
4. In notes, fill each blank chosen places. work
in the network with the
- Ask Ss to use the Travel Guide information about the Post-
in Communication as their model. place. Then use these teach - Correct. notes to write a short paragraph about it. - Research. - Draft - Check
*Homework:
- Write a travel guide in your notebook. - Prepare the next lesson
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:4/11/2017
Date of teaching: 6A,D,E: 27/11/2017 6D,E: 25/11/2017
Period 41:UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson 7: Looking Back I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can review all what they have learnt in this unit. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “things in nature” and “travel item”. 2. Structures:
Superlatives if short adjectives. Modal verb: must
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Time
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
* Presentation: 5’
- Ask Ss to label things nature - Individual
I.Vocabulary: things in they can see in the picture. work nature
1. Label the things nature
you can see in this picture. Key: 1. mountain 2. Waterfall Pre- 3. forest 4. Cave teach 5. desert 6. Lake 7. beach 8. Island 9. valley - Ask Ss to work individually - Individual and write the words about work Travel items travel items. 2. Write the words 1. 4. 2. 5. 3. 6.
Ask Ss to work individually to - Individual
* Practice: complete the sentences work II. Grammar
3. Fill the gaps in the While- following sentences. teach Key: 1. hottest 2. longest 3. highest 4. largest 5. best - Ask Ss to work in pairs and - Pair-work 4. Match the name of a 10’ match the name of a natural
nature wonder in column A wonder in column A with a
with a word in column B. word/ phrase in column B. Key:
Monitor the activity and offer 1-d help to Ss when necessary. 2-c 3-a 4-e 5-b - Ask Ss to practice the 10’
While- conversation in pair. Draw Ss’ 5. Work in pairs and teach
attention to the questions and
practice the conversation answers for the information below. Discuss all the about Mount Everest and Loch
nature wonders in 4 and Lomond. Then ask them to
any related information
discuss all the natural wonders you know. in 4. - Ask them to provide any related information they know about these natural wonders. Post-
* Production: 10’
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 teach - Divide Ss into group A and - Pair-work B. Allow them to complete III. Communication
their part of the dialogue. Then
6. Complete the dialogue. Ss act out the dialogue. Key: Choose pairs to demonstrate 1. Must
for the class. T can encourage 2. Must them to include mimes and 3. Must actions. 4. Must
*Homework:
- Do “project” on page 56. - Prepare next lesson
Date of planning:24/11/2017
Date of teaching: 6A: 27/11/2017 6D,E: 28/11/2017 Period: 42 REVIEW 2 ( Unit 4 ,5) I/ Objectives
By the end of the lesson, the students can:
• Use the lexical items related to unit 4, 5.
• Practise using the comparative and superlative of the adj. II/ Language contents
• Lexical items related to unit 4, 5.
• The comparative and superlative of the adj. III/ Teaching aids
Prepare pictures, CD disk, cassette
IV. Anticipated problems
* Ss may have difficulty in completing all exercises.
* Solution: T makes models, explains, gives eliciting questions. V.Procedures:
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 Teacher’ activities Students’ activities I.Vocabulary: Do as required
1.Find in the box the opposites of the words(Ex2/page 68)
Give Ss enough time to do the task individually.
Then tell them they will play the game 'Race to the board'.
Copy the adjective lists to the board (one copy
for each team). Ask for 20 volunteers for 2
play the game 'Race to the board'.
teams, each team of 10 students. The two teams
stand in 2 lines facing towards the board and
when they hear a signal sound from you they Key: 1. small 2. noisy 3. cheap 4.
will take turns to write the opposite on the board low 5. sad 6. hot
as quickly as they can. The fastest team which 7. unimportant 8. short
has the most correct answers wins. 9. clean 10. boring II.Grammar:
1.Rewrite the sentences,using the
Ss do the task individually first then share the
comparative or superlative of the adjectives work with the partners. in 2 above.(Ex5/p 68)
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Do the first sentence with Ss as a model. Ask
Volunteers write the sentences on the board
them to identify the adjective (cold). Ask them
to give the opposite, then elicit the new sentence Key:
beginning with the subject "Viet Nam" Tell
1. Viet Nam is much hotter than Sweden.
them to do similarly with the rest, and they can
2. The Andes is the Iongest range in the find t n the word lists in 2. world.
3. A car is often more expensive than a . motorbike.
4. Ho Chi Minh City is noisier than Hoi An.
5. The air in the city is often more polluted
than the air in the countryside.
6. Ba Be Lake is the biggest natural lake in Viet Nam.
2. Complete the sentences with the Present
simple or the Present continuous form of the verbs
.
1. They often (visit) ………..their parents in the holidays.
2. We (speak) ……..French at the moment.
3. I (watch) ……..TV about 3 hours a day.
4. My family usually (go) ………..to the movies on Sunday.
5. Look at the girl! She (ride)…..a horse.
6. We (play) ………..tennis now.
7. Minh sometimes (practice) ………..the guitar in his room.
8. …..you (like) …..chocolate ice cream?
9. I really (like) ………..cooking.
10. Hung can’t answer the phone because he (take)……….. a shower.
11. -..........They (be) your sisters?
- Yes, they(be)................
12. On my way home I often(meet) ….many
children who (go) …to school.
13. Mary (not work) …………today because it's Sunday.
14. My father and I (visit) …….Ha Long Bay this summer vacation.
15. Let’s (help)…………….. mom,
LAn. She (clean)……… the floor. Homework:
+Do exercises on workbook +Revision for test 2
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Date of planning:25/11/2017
Date of teaching: 6A: 29/11/2017 6D,E: 30/11/2017
Period 43: Written test 2
Aims: - Evaluating the students’ understanding about the learned vocabulary and structures
Objectives: - Students will be able to understand the requirement of the test and to do the test
correctly using the learned language items.
Materials: Copies of the written test needed for the whole class.
Time allowed: 45 minutes Procedure: *TEST (For class 6) 6A:29 /11/2017 6D,E: 30 /11/2017
Part A. Listening (2.5ms)
I. Listen and number the words you hear from 2 to 6. Number 1 is an example. (1.25ps) Words desert best coast boat lost boot Number 1
II. Listen to the following conversation and fill the missing words (1.25ps)
A: Excuse me. Where is the supermarket ?
B: Go to the end of this street. It’s on your (1)……………..…..
A: And where is the lower secondary school ?
B: It’s in Le Duan Street. Take the second (2)……………..….. and it’s on your left.
A. Great! Where can I have(3)…………. coffee ?
B: “Quynh” Café in Tran Quang Dieu Street is a good one. A: How can I get there ?
B: First (4)…….….. left, then turn right. Go Straight. It’s on your left. A: How about art gallery ?
B: First take the third left. Then (5)………… to the end of Le Loi Street, and it’s on your right.
Part B. Language focus (3 Ps)
I. Choose the best answer.( 1.5p)
1. There is a park in front ………. the hotel. A. of B. on C. to D. at 2. Hoi An is so ………. . A. boring B. historic C. terrible D. modern
3. The town has many motorbikes. It’s very ……. . A. quiet B. happy C. exciting D. noisy
4. My head hurts. I need to take some ……. . A. backpacks B. compasses C. painkillers D. plasters
5. Excuse me ! ………. there a post office near here ? A. Is B. Are C. Do D. Does
6. Ayres Rock is in …….. . A. Viet Nam B. Australia C. Brazil D. Great Britain
II. Give the correct form of the following verbs: ( 0.5p)
1. You must ( get )………………… up early .
2. Look ! Our teacher (come)…… …………………..
III. Fill the blanks with the appropriate forms of the adjectives in brackets(1p)
1. Travelling by taxi is ……….…………….than by bus. (expensive)
2. The Sahara is the ……………desert in the world. (hot)
3. This building is …………………… than that one. (tall)
4. She’s not very happy. Her exam results are ………..than her sister. (good)
Part C. Reading: (2,5 ms)
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
I. Complete the letter using the words in the box. (1,5 marks) air staying backyard are cleaner noisy Dear Nick,
I'm sorry I couldn't write to you earlier because I was very busy. Now, we're (1) .............in a
small hotel near a shopping area. Near my hotel, there's a cinema, and a supermarket. There
(2).................. some big shops at the end of the street. It's also very (3)................... here because
there's always a lot of traffic, day and night. In my hometown I live in a quieter street. There
are some small shops, a school, a post office but there isn't a cinema. The streets are narrower
but they are (4).................... and there isn't so much traffic. The (5) .......................... is much
fresher, too. And every house has a (6) .......................... and a front yard.
II.Read the E-mail and answer the following questions.( 1p) Dear Phong!
I’m sorry I couldn’t write to you earlier because I was very busy. Now, we’re staying in a small
hotel near a shopping area in District 10. Near my hotel, there’s a cinema, a bank, a supermarket
and some cafés. There are some big shops at the end of the street. It is also very noisy
here because there’s always a lot of traffic, day and night.
In my hometown, I live in a quieter street. There are some small shops, a school and a market
in my neighbourhood but there isn’t a park and a cinema. The streets are narrower but they are
cleaner and there isn’t so much traffic. The air is much fresher, too. And every house has a backyard and a front yard. Love, Minh 1. Where is Minh staying now?
2. Why is it very noisy around his hotel?
3.What are there in his neighbourhood?
4.Is there a cinema in his neighbourhood? Part D. Writing (2ms)
I. Reorder the words to make the meaningful sentences.( 1p )
1. modern / This / is / that / more / hotel / than / one.
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
2. on / Take / turning / the / left / the / second.
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
3. a / square / there / near / house / Is / your ?
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
4. do / at / must / You/ homework / home / your.
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
II. Rewrite these sentences so that it has the same meaning as the root ones. (1P)
1. Viet Nam doesn’t have any deserts.
-> There…. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .
2. No one in my class is more beautiful than Hanh.
-> Hanh...............................................................
3. The hospital is on the left of the museum.
-> The museum is ..........................................................
4. My house is smaller than Lan’s house.
-> Lan’s house is ...........................................................
TOT DONG SECONDARY SCHOOL TEST 2(45 minutes)
Full name:..............................................
Subject: English 6. Period :43
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 Class: 6A
.………, November…… 2017 Mark Teacher’s remark
Part A. Listening (2.5ms)
I. Listen and number the words you hear from 2 to 6. Number 1 is an example. (1.25ps) Words desert best coast boat lost boot Number 1
II. Listen to the following conversation and fill the missing words (1.25ps)
A: Excuse me. Where is the supermarket ?
B: Go to the end of this street. It’s on your (1)……………..…..
A: And where is the lower secondary school ?
B: It’s in Le Duan Street. Take the second (2)……………..….. and it’s on your left.
A. Great! Where can I have(3)…………. coffee ?
B: “Quynh” Café in Tran Quang Dieu Street is a good one. A: How can I get there ?
B: First (4)…….….. left, then turn right. Go Straight. It’s on your left. A: How about art gallery ?
B: First take the third left. Then (5)………… to the end of Le Loi Street, and it’s on your right.
Part B. Language focus (3 Ps)
I. Choose the best answer.( 1.5p)
1. There is a park in front ………. the hotel. A. of B. on C. to D. at 2. Hoi An is so ………. . A. boring B. historic C. terrible D. modern
3. The town has many motorbikes. It’s very ……. . A. quiet B. happy C. exciting D. noisy
4. My head hurts. I need to take some ……. . A. backpacks B. compasses C. painkillers D. plasters
5. Excuse me ! ………. there a post office near here ? A. Is B. Are C. Do D. Does
6. Ayres Rock is in …….. . A. Viet Nam B. Australia C. Brazil D. Great Britain
II. Give the correct form of the following verbs: ( 0.5p)
1. You must ( get )………………… up early .
2. Look ! Our teacher (come)…… …………………..
III. Fill the blanks with the appropriate forms of the adjectives in brackets(1p)
1. Travelling by taxi is ……….…………….than by bus. (expensive)
2. The Sahara is the ……………desert in the world. (hot)
3. This building is …………………… than that one. (tall)
4. She’s not very happy. Her exam results are ………..than her sister. (good)
Part C. Reading: (2,5 ms)
I. Complete the letter using the words in the box. (1,5 marks) air staying backyard are cleaner noisy Dear Nick,
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
I'm sorry I couldn't write to you earlier because I was very busy. Now, we're (1) .............in a
small hotel near a shopping area. Near my hotel, there's a cinema, and a supermarket. There
(2).................. some big shops at the end of the street. It's also very (3)................... here because
there's always a lot of traffic, day and night. In my hometown I live in a quieter street. There
are some small shops, a school, a post office but there isn't a cinema. The streets are narrower
but they are (4).................... and there isn't so much traffic. The (5) .......................... is much
fresher, too. And every house has a (6) .......................... and a front yard.
II.Read the E-mail and answer the following questions.( 1p) Dear Phong!
I’m sorry I couldn’t write to you earlier because I was very busy. Now, we’re staying in a small
hotel near a shopping area in District 10. Near my hotel, there’s a cinema, a bank, a supermarket
and some cafés. There are some big shops at the end of the street. It is also very
noisy here because there’s always a lot of traffic, day and night.
In my hometown, I live in a quieter street. There are some small shops, a school and a market
in my neighbourhood but there isn’t a park and a cinema. The streets are narrower but they are
cleaner and there isn’t so much traffic. The air is much fresher, too. And every house has a backyard and a front yard. Love, Minh 1.Where is Minh staying now?
………………………………. …………………………………………………………………. .
2.Why is it very noisy around his hotel?
…………………………………………………………………………………………………….
3.What are there in his neighbourhood?
…………………………………………. . .. ... .. .. ..…………………………………………….
4.Is there a cinema in his neighbourhood?
……………………………………………...........…………………..…………………………… Part D. Writing (2ms)
I. Reorder the words to make the meaningful sentences.( 1p )
1. modern / This / is / that / more / hotel / than / one.
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
2. on / Take / turning / the / left / the / second.
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
3. a / square / there / near / house / Is / your ?
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
4. do / at / must / You/ homework / home / your.
-> …………………………..……………………………………………………………..
II. Rewrite these sentences so that it has the same meaning as the root ones. (1P)
1. Viet Nam doesn’t have any deserts.
-> There…. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .
2. No one in my class is more beautiful than Hanh.
-> Hanh...............................................................
3. The hospital is on the left of the museum.
-> The museum is ..........................................................
4. My house is smaller than Lan’s house.
-> Lan’s house is ...........................................................
Date of planning:26/11/2017
Date of teaching: 6A,D,E: 2/12/2017
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Period 44: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY x
Lesson 1: Getting Started I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can know the key language and structures to be learnt in this unit. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “Tet”: things, activities and practices. 2. Structures:
Will to express intentions.
Should/ shouldn’t for advice.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, picture. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’ Content Time Activities
* Presentation: 5 - Write the word TET on the - Whole mins board and ask St to give any class TET HOLIDAY Pre- words they know relating to teach the topic. Allow Ss to give a Vietnamese word and ask other Ss in the class if they know the equivalent in - Ask Ss to answer the - Answer
* Practice: 10 questions.
1. Listen and read mins - Introduce some new words Questions: or revise the ones already
- Listen and − What will they talk about? learnt to prepare Ss well for read − When is Tet this year? listening such as celebrate, − What do you do at Tet?
decorate and fireworks. Then While- play the recording. teach
- Ask Ss to work individually. - Individual
2. Are those following 10
Ideally ask them the questions work
statements true or false mins without referring to the
according to the conversation listening.
in 1? Tick the correct column. - Ask them to explain why Key:
they think a statement is false 1. F 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. T and they can correct it.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 - Ask Ss to do the task in
- Individual 3. Find the information in 1 10
pairs. Tell Ss to refer back to work
and fill in the blanks. mins the conversation to find the Key: information.
1. This year we will have Tet at
- Ask them if the information the end of January. given is true and if they can 2. We decorate our house. add anything. 3. We buy flowers and plants.
4. We shouldn’t burn fireworks. 5. We eat great food and get lucky money during Tet. 6. Tet is a time for family gatherings. - Let Ss do the matching
4. Write the words/ phrases in independently as the - Individual
the box under the appropriate 10 While- vocabulary is quite simple work pictures. mins teach and some of them will be Key:
familiar to them like School 1. b 5. h
ground, books, swimming 2. a 6. g pool, etc. 3. c 7. f 4. e 8. d - Ask Ss to answer the
5. Look at the pictures again. question by referring to the - Pair-work Which pictures do you think pictures. Picture 4 might get are related to Tet? different answers from Ss in Key:
the south where it’s very hot About Tet: 1 2 3 7 8 and Ss in the north where Tet
is usually the coldest time of the year.
* Production: 10 - Ask Ss to write down three - Group- 6. Game mins things or activities you like work Write down three things or best about Tet.
activities you like best about Post- - Have them compare their Tet. teach list with members of their
group. Report the result to the
*Homework: class. - Learn Vocabulary. - Practice the conversation. - Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning:1/12/2017
Date of teaching: 6A: 4/12/2017
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 6D,E: 5/12/2017
Period 45: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can pronounce correctly the sounds /t/ and /st/ in isolation
and in context; use vocabulary related to “travel item”. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “Tet”: things, activities and practices. 2. Structures:
Will to express intentions.
Should/ shouldn’t for advice.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, flash cards. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’ Content Time Activities
* Presentation: 5 I.Vocabulary mins - Play the recording.
- Listen and Things and activities for Tet Ask Ss to listen repeat
1. Listen and repeat the words in carefully and repeat the the box. Pre- words first, then divide a. Wish g. Flower teach them into smaller and b. Fireworks h. Relative smaller groups. c. Furniture i. Pagoda - Observe and make d. Present j. Calendar sure that every St is e. Shopping k. Special food speaking. f. Free
* Practice: 10 - Ask Ss to work in - Group-
2. Work in groups. Label the mins groups of 3. work
pictures with the words in 1. - Ask Ss to look at the Key:
pictures first and see if 1. a 7. h they know the words. 2. i 8. e Then ask them to do 3. d 9. k the matching. 4. j 10. c 5. f 11. a While- 6. g teach
3. Match the verbs with the suitable 10 - Write a verb on the - Whole nouns. mins board and ask Ss to class Key:
match the verb with as 1. cook special food many as nouns as they 2. go to the pagoda can find. 3. give lucky money - Check that Ss 4. visit relative understand the 5. clean the furniture meanings of the words
- Individual 6. decorate our house
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 and let them match. work 7. plant trees - Ask them to work 8. make a wish
independently first and 9. hang a calendar check with their 10. watch fireworks partners. Sometime 11. do the shopping more than one answer 12. buy peach blossoms. is possible. - Whole
4. Write the phrases you have class
formed in 3. The first one is an - Have Ss write the example. phrases you have formed in 3.
- Listen and II. Pronunciation /ʃ/ and /s/ repeat
5. Listen and repeat the words.
- Ask Ss to practice the
Which words have the sound /ʃ/ and sound /ʃ/ and /s/
which words have the sound /s/? together. Key: - Play the recording /ʃ/ /s/ and ask Ss to listen She, shopping, Blossoms, carefully first and should, wish, summer, rice, repeat. Ask them to rubbish. celebrate,
write the words in two school, special, appropriate boxes. spring. Check if they do this 10 correctly.
- Individual 6. Listen to the sentences and tick mins work
which has /ʃ/ and which has /s/ Key: /ʃ/ : 2, 3, 5 /s/: 1, 4, 6, 7 - Ask Ss to look at the sentences and underline the words they think contain the sounds /ʃ/ and /s/. Play the recording and ask them to tick to the columns.
* Production: 10 - Allow Ss to practice - Group-
7. Listen and practice reading the mins reading the poem work
short poem. Pay attention to the Post- among themselves. sounds /ʃ/ and /s/ teach - Ask for some volunteers to stand up
*Homework: and read the poem - Learn vocabulary by heart. aloud. - Prepare the next lesson.
Date of planning:2/12/2017
Date of teaching: 6A: 7/12/2017 6D,E: 8/12/2017
Period 46: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can identify and practice the language of intentions (with
will) and advice (with should). II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “Tet”: things, activities and practices. 2. Structures:
Will to express intentions.
Should/ shouldn’t for advice.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Time I. Grammar 5
* Presentation: Should and shouldn’t mins
- Use the pictures to practice
1. Look at the pictures and the target language of should - Individual
complete the sentences with should Pre- and shouldn’t in more work or shouldn’t. teach
familiar situations. Ask Ss to Key: complete the four sentences. 1. Shouldn’t 2. Should Make sure that they combine 3.Shouldn’t 4.Should “should” and the verb
* Practice: 10 - Ask Ss to look at the four - Individual
2. At the TV studio, Phong sees mins signs in the studio and let work
these signs. Complete the sentences them complete the
with should or shouldn’t. sentences. Key:
- Draw their attention to the 1. Should 2.Shouldn’t fact that it is a TV studio 3.Should 4.Shouldn’t where people are working. Remember: - Go around and see if they
We use should for things that are write the sentences good to do. correctly.
We use shouldn’t for things that bad to do.
3. Now look at these Tet activities. While-
Tick the activities children should teach
do at Tet. Cross the activities they shouldn’t. - Individual Key: - Ask Ss to tick or cross the work Should Shouldn’t activities. The phrases 10 1 2 illustrated by pictures make mins 3 4 their meanings clear. 5 7 6 8 4.
Use the activities in 3, write down the sentences. 1. We should behave well.
2. We shouldn’t eat lots of sweets. 3. We should plant trees.
4. We shouldn’t break things.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 - Pair-work
5. We should go out with friends. - Ask Ss to write the 6. We shouldn’t fight.
sentences by referring to the
7. We shouldn’t play cards all 10 activities 3. night. mins - Go around and check for Grammar any spelling or grammar
Will and won’t (will not) mistakes.
1. Read Phong’s letter to Tom.
2. Use the information in the letter
and write full sentences in the two columns. Key:
1. My father will repaint our house. - Individual
2. I will go shopping with Mum. - Before reading. Have them work 3. We will buy red envelopes. revise some words Ss have
4. I will help my parents cook banh learnt in the previous chung. activities like “go 5. I’ll write again soon. shopping”, “New year 6. We won’t buy fireworks. celebration” etc. Then ask - Pair-work 7. We won’t buy banh chung. Ss to read the letter. - Ask ss to use the information from the letter and write the sentences in two columns. - Go around and see if they write the sentences correctly.
* Production: 10 - Emphasize that Ss write
- Pair - work 3. Phong is thinking about his Tet. mins the TRUE sentences of what
Write sentences about what he will
Phong will/ won’t do at Tet. and won’t do. Remind Ss of the kind of Key: Post- words they have to add in
1. Phong will visit his relatives. teach order to complete the
2. He will get some lucky money. sentences. 3. He will go out. 4. He won’t study. Phong won’t give a present.
*Homework:
- Practice more the language of intentions (with will) and advice (with should). - Prepare next lesson
Date of planning: 8 /12/2017
Date of teaching:6A :11/12/2017
PERIOD47 : CHECK THE TEST 2
I. Aims: - Helping students to recognize the mistakes made in the written test.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 II. Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to recognize the mistakes in their test.
III. Materials: Test papers which have been marked. IV. Procedure: T’s activities Ss’ activities Content (Clas: 6A) I) Warm up:
- Sing a song Part A. Listening (2.5ms) - Greeting. to warm up
- Get the class to sing a the class.
I. Listen and number the words you hear from 2 song. - Listen.
to 6. Number 1 is an example. (1.25ps) II) New lesson: - Receive the - Give general test papers Words
desert best coast boat lost boot comments. - Pay Number 6 1 3 2 4 5
- Give the test papers attention back to ss - Listen II.
Listen to the following conversation and fill - Give comments in
the missing words (1.25ps) details. (1)right (2)right (3) some - Praise the excellent (4)turn (5) go
students and encourage - Listen to
Part B. Language focus (3 Ps) the not- good- yet ones. the
I. Choose the best answer.( 1.5p) conclusions 1.-A. of ; 2.- B. historic ; 3.-D.noisy
III) Consolidation: to make sure 4.-C.painkillers ; 5.-A. is ; 6.-B. Australia - Commment in to do well
II. Give the correct form of the following verbs: conclusions. next time. ( 0.5p) 1. ( get)→ get . 2. (come)→ is coming
III. Fill the blanks with the appropriate forms of
the adjectives in brackets(1p)

1. (expensive) →more expensive. 2. (hot)hottest 3. (tall)→ taller 4. (good)→
Part C. Reading: (2,5 ms)
I. Complete the letter using the words in the box. (1,5 marks) 1. staying ; 2.are ;3.noisy 4. cleaner ; 5.air ;6.backyard
II.Read the E-mail and answer the following questions.( 1p)
1. Now,he’s staying in a small hotel near a shopping area in District 10.
2. It is very noisy here because there’s always a lot
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 of traffic, day and night.
3. There are some small shops, a school and a market in his neighbourhood 4. No, there isn’t. Part D. Writing (2ms)
I. Reorder the words to make the meaningful sentences.( 1p )
1. This hotel is more modern than that one.
2. Take the second turning on the left.
3. Is there a square near your house?
4. You must do your homework at home.
II. Rewrite these sentences so that it has the
same meaning as the root ones. (1P)
1. Viet Nam doesn’t have any deserts.
-> There aren’t any deserts in Viet Nam.
2. No one in my class is more beautiful than Hanh.
-> Hanh is the most beautiful girl in my class
3. The hospital is on the left of the museum.
-> The museum is on the right of the hospital.
4. My house is smaller than Lan’s house.
-> Lan’s house is bigger than my house.
*Homework:
- Prepare the next lesson :Communication
*Homework: - Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning: 8 /12/2017
Date of teaching:6A :11/12/2017
PERIOD47 : CHECK THE TEST 2
I. Aims: - Helping students to recognize the mistakes made in the written test. II. Objectives:
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to recognize the mistakes in their test.
III. Materials: Test papers which have been marked. IV. Procedure: T’s activities Ss’ activities Content (Clas: 6D,E) I) Warm up:
- Sing a song Part A. Listening (2.5ms) - Greeting. to warm up
- Get the class to sing a the class.
I. Listen and number the words you hear from 2 song. - Listen.
to 6. Number 1 is an example. (1.25ps) II) New lesson: - Receive the - Give general test papers Words
desert best coast boat lost boot comments. - Pay Number 6 1 3 2 4 5
- Give the test papers attention back to ss - Listen II.
Listen to the following conversation and fill - Give comments in
the missing words (1.25ps) details. (1) end (2)right (3) some - Praise the excellent (4)turn (5) go
students and encourage - Listen to
Part B. Language focus (3 Ps) the not- good- yet ones. the
I. Choose the best answer.( 1.5p) conclusions 1.- B. historic
; 2.-D.noisy; 3.- C.painkillers
III) Consolidation: to make sure 4.- B. Australia; 5.-A. in ; 6.-C. better - Commment in to do well
II. Give the correct form of the following verbs: conclusions. next time. ( 0.5p) 1. (come)→ is coming 2. (play)→ play
III. Fill the blanks with the appropriate forms of
the adjectives in brackets(1p)
1. (hot)hottest 2. (tall)→ taller 3. (good)→better
4.(intelligent)→most intelligent Part C. Reading: (2,5 ms)
I. Complete the letter using the words in the box. (1,5 marks) 1. staying ; 2.are ;3.noisy 4. cleaner ; 5.air ;6.backyard
II.Read the E-mail and answer the following questions.( 1p)
1. Now,he’s staying in a small hotel near a shopping area in District 10.
2. It is very noisy here because there’s always a lot of traffic, day and night.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 3. No, there isn’t. 4. No, there isn’t. Part D. Writing (2ms)
I. Reorder the words to make the meaningful sentences.( 1p )
1. This hotel is more modern than that one.
2. Take the second turning on the left.
3. Is there a square near your house?
4. You must do your homework at home.
II. Rewrite these sentences so that it has the
same meaning as the root ones. (1P)
1. Viet Nam doesn’t have any deserts.
-> There aren’t any deserts in Viet Nam.
2. No one in my class is more beautiful than Hanh.
-> Hanh is the most beautiful girl in my class
3. The hospital is on the left of the museum.
-> The museum is on the right of the hospital.
4. My house is smaller than Lan’s house.
-> Lan’s house is bigger than my house.
*Homework:
- Prepare the next lesson :Communication
*Homework: - Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning: 9 /12/2017
Date of teaching:6A :13/12/2017 6D,E :14/12/2017
Period 48: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
Lesson 4: Communication I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can get to know New Year practices in some other countries. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “Tet”: things, activities and practices. 2. Structures:
Will to express intentions.
Should/ shouldn’t for advice.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’ Content Time Activities
* Presentation:
1. Match the flags with the 5 - Show Ss the flags of five
- Individual countries. Then match the mins countries and ask them if work
countries with their nationalities. them know the names of Key: the countries, where they 1. Holland (Dutch) Pre- are and what else they 2. Japan (Japanese) teach know about these 3. The USA (American) countries. 4. Australia (Australian) - Ask them to do the 5. Thailand (Thai) matching of flags and 6. Vietnam (Vietnamese) countries. 7. Scotland (Scottish) 8. Korea (Korean)
* Practice: 2. Game. 10 - Make 8 hats with the
Prepare pictures of flags. Walk mins
flags at the front . Call 8 Ss - Whole
around and meet people. Tell them and ask them to wear the class
where you are from. They will tell hats. you your nationalities. - Divide the class into 4
Ex:A:Hi, I’m from England. groups and see which B: You’re English.
group can call out the right names the most quickly.
A:Hi, I’m from Viet Nam.
B: You’re Vietnamese. - Let Ss look at the While-
pictures, discuss and make
3. People at different countries 10 teach a guess about which
celebrate New Year differently. mins country the pictures are - Pair-work
Match the four groups of people about. with the pictures. - Ask them to match the Key: pictures with the four 1. The Scottish, Scotland. groups of people. 2. The Thai, Thailand. 3. The H’Mong, Vietnam. 4. The Japanese, Japan. - Help Ss by drawing their attention to some details
4. Read the four paragraphs from the reading and
below. Use the pictures in 3 to 10
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 referring to the pictures - Pair-work
help you decide which group of mins provided in 3.
people celebrates New Year that - Ask them to underline the day. verbs and objects of some Key: practices. 1. H’Mong 2. Thai 2. 3. Japanese 4. Scottish
5. Find and check the meanings of - Don’t let Ss do this task
some new words as they are used before they spot the words/
in the text by matching them with phrases as they are used in the definitions. the sentence and encourage Key: them to use the context to
a. The covers of a rooster, chicken guess the meanings of the or bird. word/ phrase. b. An adult male chicken. c. Take away.
d. The first person to enter your home after New Year’s Eve.
* Production: 10 - Have ss work in pairs and - Group- 6. Group work mins do this activities. work
Each Ss choose two facts from the
four paragraphs he/she is most Post-
interested in. write them down and teach
take turns to read them aloud to
his/ her group. The group decides
which group of people he / she talking about.
*Homework: - Prepare the next lesson
Date of planning: 10 /12/2017
Date of teaching:6A,D,E :16/12/2017
PERIOD 49:UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY Lesson 5: Skills 1 I. Objectives:
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
By the end of this lesson, students can get to know New Year practices in some other countries. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “Tet”: things, activities and practices. 2. Structures:
Will to express intentions.
Should/ shouldn’t for advice.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities
Ss’ Activities Content Time
* Presentation: Questions: 5
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures of - Whole - What is his/ her name? mins children and the names of the class - Where is he/ she from? Pre-
countries first to have some ideas teach
about which countries they are going to read about.
* Practice: I. Reading 10
- Ask Ss to read the text. Allow - Individual
1. Children in different mins
them to read a second time and work
countries are talking about
underline some words they don’t
their New Year. Read the know. passages.(Page 64) - Ask Ss to do this task
2. Say who the following individually. - Individual
statement refer to. Number 1 - Let Ss look back at the work is an example.
passages as many times as they A. Russ B. Wu C. Mai would like to. Key: - Check with the whole class. 1. C 5. B 2. A 6. C While- 3. B teach 4. C
- Ask Ss not to look back at the
3. Test your memory! Tick the passages and see how many
things which appear in the 10 questions they answer right. - Pair-work
passages, and cross the ones mins which don’t. Key: Appear Don’t appear a d b e c h f j g i
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6 II. Speaking
- Revise what Ss have learnt in 1,
4. The following practices
both vocabulary and practices.
and beliefs are from the Encourage Ss to give more
passages in 1. Talk to your
activities than ones provided in - Pair-work
friends and say which one(s) 10 the passages.
you will do or won’t do this mins New Year. Example: 1. I won’t go to the Time Square to welcome the New Year.
- Turn this into a free activities for Ss to talk about New Year 5. Work in groups.
beliefs both in their country and Write two popular beliefs you
in others. Ask them to write two know about the New Year
popular beliefs you know about and tell your partners. the New Year and tell your - Group- partners. Get Ss to talk. work
* Production: 10 - Have Ss discuss with their - Pair -work
6. Look at the list. Discuss mins friends what they should or
with your friends what you shouldn’t do at Tet.
should or shouldn’t do at Tet. Post- Example: teach A: We should make a wish.
B: I agree. But we shouldn’t get up early. …
*Homework: - Prepare the next lesson:
UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY Lesson 6: Skills 2 I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can listen to get the information about Tet activities and
write an email to friend about their Tet holiday. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “Tet”: things, activities and practices.
Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
2. Structures: Will to express intentions.
Should/ shouldn’t for advice.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’ Content Time Activities
* Presentation: 15 - Let Ss look at the - T whole  Listening mins list and read them class
1. Mai and her mother are going aloud. Make sure
shopping for Tet. Listen and tick the they pronounce the things they will buy. words correctly. This Key: While- will help them 1. peach blossoms teach recognize the key 3. new clothes words in the 4. a tie listening. 5. sweets - Play the tape three 7. chocolate biscuits times and ask them which words from
* Practice: 15 - This activity can be
- Individual 2. Listen again and write the names mins done only after one work
of things they will buy for the people has been successfully in column A. completed. - Ask Ss to look Key: carefully at the list 1. Clothes While- things Mai and her 2. A tie teach mother will buy. 3. Some sweets Then look at the list of people as a guide so that they will focus on these people for the listening.
* Production: 15 mins - Ask Ss to write an - Individual  Writing e-mail to a friend work
3. Now write an e-mail to a friend Post- about their Tet
about your Tet holiday. Include teach holiday
what you will and won’t do. Also
include things people should and
shouldn’t do. Use your notes from
Speaking and the rest of the unit to help you.

Tot Dong secondary school
English Lesson Plan - Grade 6
*Homework:
- Write the e-mail into your notebook. - Prepare the next lesson
UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY Lesson 7: Looking Back I. Objectives:
By the end of this lesson, students can review all what they have learnt in this unit. II. Language Focus:
1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to “Tet”: things, activities and practices. 2. Structures:
Will to express intentions.
Should/ shouldn’t for advice.
III. Teaching aids: Course book, CD player, pictures. IV. Procedures: Part
Teacher’s Activities Ss’ Content Time Activities - Ask Ss to draw line to
* Presentation: Pre-teach match the actions on the - Individual  Vocabulary 5 left with the things on the work
1. Draw line to match the mins right.
actions on the left with the things on the right. Key:
1. j ; 2. e; 3. d; 4. c; 5. i; 6. f
7. h; 8. g; 9. a; 10. k; 11. b
* Practice: - Ask Ss to play a game. - Individual
2. Game: “About or Not about 10 This game is for Ss to work Tet?” mins revise the Tet vocabulary,
Five volunteer stand in front of not only in meaning but the class. They take turn to also in pronunciation. It read aloud each phrase from also trans Ss’ memory and
the list. The quickest student quick reactions.
with the right answer gets one
point for one right answer. The
student with the highest score wins. - Show Ss a picture of - Pair-work  Grammar 10 New year in Thailand and
3. Phong is visiting Thailand at mins ask if they could still
their New Year Festival. Look remember anything about
at the list of what he will or New Year Festival in
will not do. Then write out Thailand. complete sentences. - Ask them questions: Key: While- when is New Year Will teach Festival in Thailand?, Phong will travel by plane. What is the weather Phong will wear shorts and a like?... T-shirt. - Ask them to look at the Phong will get wet. list and make up sentences Phong will throw water at of what Phong will or others. won’t do in Thailand. Phong will watch the elephants. Won’t Phong won’t stay at home. Phong won’t eat banh chung. Phong won’t go to school.
Phong won’t get lucky money.
Phong won’t wait for the first - Individual footer. work 10 - Ask Ss to look at the
4. Tom is asking Phong what mins summary first and see
children in Vietnam should or how much they can fill in
shouldn’t do at Tet. Listen and before the listening.
fill in the summary with should - Play the recording and or shouldn’t. check if Ss get the right Key: answer. 1. Should 4. Shouldn’t 2. Should 5. Shouldn’t 3. Should 6. Should
* Production:Communication - Ask Ss to rearrange the
- Pair-work 5. Rearrange the words in each 10 words in each sentence to
sentence to make New Year mins make New Year wishes wishes and greetings. and greetings. Key: Post-teach 1. I wish you a Happy New Year.
2. Have a great year with your studies. 3. I wish you success in your career. 4. I wish you a joyful year.
*Homework:
- Do “project” on page 67.